PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY

(An Autonomous Institution Recognised by AICTE, New Delhi and Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
Accredited with A+ Grade by NAAC. An ISO 9001:2015 Certified Institution
Melathediyoor, Tirunelveli – 627 152

DEPARTMENT OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

B.E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM

(I TO VIII SEMESTER)

&

SYLLABUS

(III TO VI SEMESTER)

(REGULATION - 2022)
PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
(An Autonomous Institution Recognised by AICTE, New Delhi and Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
Accredited with A+ Grade by NAAC. An ISO 9001:2015 Certified Institution
Melathediyoor, Tirunelveli – 627 152

REGULATIONS – R2022 (Full Time)

B.E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

INDEX
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1 VISION AND MISSION OF THE INSTITUTE ii
2 VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT ii
3 PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) ii
4 PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs) iii
5 PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) iv
CURRICULUM
6 SEMESTER I v
7 SEMESTER II v
8 SEMESTER III vii
9 SEMESTER IV vii
10 SEMESTER V viii
11 SEMESTER VI viii
12 SEMESTER VII ix
13 SEMESTER VIII ix
14 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE I x
15 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE II x
16 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE III xi
17 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE IV xi
18 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE V xii
19 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE VI xii
20 INSTITUTE ELECTIVE xiii
21 SUMMARY SHEET xiv
SYLLABUS
22 SEMESTER III 1
23 SEMESTER IV 21
24 SEMESTER V 40
25 SEMESTER VI 56
26 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE I 71
27 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE II 91
28 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE III 112
29 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE IV 133
30 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE V 154
31 PROGRAMME ELECTIVE VI 174
32 INSTITUTE ELECTIVE 195

i
 PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
(An Autonomous Institution Recognised by AICTE, New Delhi and Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
Accredited with A+ Grade by NAAC. An ISO 9001:2015 Certified Institution
Melathediyoor, Tirunelveli – 627 152

REGULATIONS – R2022 (Full Time)

B.E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

INSTITUTE VISION
Emerge as a pioneer institute inculcating engineering education and skills research
INSTITUTE MISSION
IM-1: To achieve greater heights of excellence in technical knowledge and skill development
through innovative teaching and learning practices.
IM-2: To develop the infrastructure to meet the demands of technological revolution.
IM-3: To improve and foster research in all dimensions for betterment of society.
IM-4: To develop individual competencies to enhance employability and entrepreneurship in
students.
IM-5: To instill higher standards of discipline among students, inculcating ethical and moral values
for societal harmony and peace.

DEPARTMENT VISION
To Produce competent, disciplined quality Engineers and administrators in accordance with global
standards in Civil Engineering with capability of accepting new challenges.

DEPARTMENT MISSION
 DM1: To train the students to meet dynamic needs of the society.
 DM2: To promote research and continuing education.
 DM3: To enhance professional and entrepreneurial skills through industry institute interaction.

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

Sl. No. Objective PEOs
PEO1 Fundamental To impart Knowledge on the fundamental principles of mathematics,
Knowledge science, and sub-disciplines in the field of Civil Engineering
To make them undergo industrial training, and Professional
PEO2 Career
development courses inculcating the habit of perceptual learning for
Development
career development.
PEO3 To develop effective communication skills and make them socially
Social Identity
responsible to work cooperatively in all environments.

ii
 PROGRAM OUTCOMES
PO’S
Knowledge Statement Appliance
No.
Theory/
Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,
Engineering Practical /
1 engineering fundamentals and an engineering
Knowledge Project
specialization to the solution of Complex
work
engineering problems.
Identify, formulate, review research literature, and
analyze complex engineering problems reaching Theory /
2 Problem Analysis substantiated conclusions using first principles of Practical /
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering Projects
sciences.

Design solutions for complex engineering problems

Design / Theory /
and design system components or processes that
3 Development of Practical /
meet the needs with appropriate consideration for the
Solutions Projects
public health and safety, and the cultural, Societal
and environmental considerations.

Conduct Use research-based knowledge and research methods

Theory /
4 Investigations of including design of experiments, analysis and
Practical
Complex Problems interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions.
Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, Theory /
Modern Tool resources and modern engineering and IT tools Practical /
5 usage including prediction and modelling to complex Project
engineering activities with an understanding of the work
limitations.
Apply reasoning informed by the contextual Theory /
The Engineer and knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal Industrial
6 Society and cultural issues and the consequent visit /
responsibilities relevant to the professional In plant
engineering practice. training

Understand the impact of the professional Theory /

engineering solutions in societal and environmental Industrial
Environment and
7 contexts and demonstrate the knowledge of and need Visit/
Sustainability
for sustainable development. In plant
Training
Theory /
Apply ethical principles and commit to professional
Industrial
Ethics ethics and responsibilities and norms of the
8 visit /
engineering practice.
In plant
training

iii
 PROGRAM OUTCOMES
PO’S
Knowledge Statement Appliance
No.

Individual and Team Function effectively as an individual and as a

9 Work Projects
member or leader in diverse teams and in
multidisciplinary settings.
Communicate effectively on complex engineering
activities with the engineering community and Projects/
Communication with society at large such as being able to Seminar/ Mini
10
comprehend and write effective reports and design Project
documentation, make effective presentations and
give and receive clear instructions.
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
Project Management engineering and management principles and apply
11 Projects
and Finance these to one's own work, as a member and leader
in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
Recognize the need for, and have the preparation
Projects /
12 Life-long Learning and ability to engage in independent and life-long
learning in the broadest context of technological Higher Studies
change.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

Ability to apply the knowledge of Mathematics, Sciences and Engineering
PSO1 Fundamentals to formulate, analyze and provide solutions to the problems related to
Civil Engineering and communicating them effectively.
Development of skill to deal with complex problems in the field of Civil Engineering to
PSO2
achieve design solutions with modern technological approach and application software.

iv
 PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
(Autonomous)

CURRICULUM – R 2022

B.E. –CIVIL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER - I

Course Classificati
Sl.No Course Name L T P C
Code on
1. IC610001 Professional English I IC Theory 2 0 0 2
2. IC610002 Matrices and Calculus IC Theory 2 1 0 3
3. IC610003 Engineering Physics IC Theory 3 0 0 3
4. IC610004 Engineering Chemistry IC Theory 3 0 0 3
Problem Solving and ‘C’
5. IC610005 IC Theory 3 0 0 3
Programming
Theory with
6. ME610006 Engineering Graphics with CAD IC 2 0 2 3
Practical
7. IC610007 Tamil Marabu/Heritage of Tamil IC Theory 1 0 0 1
8. IP610101 Physics & Chemistry Laboratory IC Practical 0 0 3 1.5

9. IP610102 Programming in ‘C’ Laboratory IC Practical 0 0 3 1.5

Institute
10. NCC/NSS/NSO * IM 1 0 0 0
Mandatory
Total 17 1 8 21

SEMESTER - II

Course
Sl.No Course Name Classification L T P C
Code
Theory with
1. IC620008 Professional English II IC 2 0 2 3
Practical
Transforms & Partial
2. IC620009 IC Theory 2 1 0 3
Differential Equations
Engineering Materials
IC620010 IC 3 0 0
(for Non Circuit Branches)
3. Theory 3
Semiconductor Physics
IC620011 IC 3 0 0
(for Circuit Branches)
Engineering Mechanics
ME620012 3 0 0
(for Non Circuit Branches)
Theory with
4. Fundamentals of Artificial PC 3
Project
CS620013 Intelligence (for Circuit 3 0 0
Branches)
ii
5. CS620014 Python Programming IC Theory 3 0 0 3
6. ME620015 Basic Engineering IC Theory 3 0 0 3

7. 1C620016 Tamils and Technology IC Theory 1 0 0 1

Institute
8. IM610401 Environmental Studies IM 2 0 0 0
Mandatory
9. IP620103 Python Laboratory IC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
10. IP620104 Engineering Practice Laboratory IC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Total 25 1 8 22
*The curriculum framed and approved by under the first year board / chairman.

iii
 SEMESTER – III

Course
Sl.No Course Name Classification L T P C
Code
Numerical Methods and
1. IC630017 IC Theory 2 1 0 3
Statistics
2. CE630201 Surveying PC Theory 3 0 0 3
Theory with
3. CE630202 Concrete Technology PC 2 0 2 3
Practical
Theory with
4. CE630203 Highway Engineering PC 3 0 0 3
Project
5. CE630204 Geotechnical Engineering I PC Theory 3 0 0 3
6. # Professional Elective I PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. CE630301 Surveying Laboratory PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Computer Aided Building
8. CE630302 PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Drawing
Integrated Aptitude Skills - I Skill Based
9. CE630501 EEC 0 0 1 0.5
(Lower) Course
10. IM630402 Universal Human Values IM Theory 2 0 0 0
Total 18 01 09 21.5

SEMESTER – IV

Course
Sl.No Course Name Classification L T P C
Code
Boundary Value Problems and
1. IC640018 IC Theory 2 1 0 3
Probality Distributions
Theory with
2. CE640205 Mechanics of Materials PC 2 0 2 3
Practical
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Theory with
3. CE640206 PC
Project
3 0 0 3
Machinery
4. CE640207 Geotechnical Engineering II PC Theory 3 0 0 3
5. # Professional Elective II PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. * Institute Elective I IE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. CE640303 Hydraulics Laboratory PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Geotechnical Engineering
8. CE640304 PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
Integrated Aptitude Skills - II EE Skill Based
9. CE640502 0 0 1 0.5
(Lower) C Course
10. - Inplant Training (2 Weeks) IM - - - -
Total 16 01 09 21.5

iv
 SEMESTER – V

Course
Sl.No Course Name Classification L T P C
Code
CE650208 Structural Analysis I Theory with
1. PC 2 0 2 3
Practical
CE650209 Design of RC Elements Theory with
2. PC 2 1 0 3
Project
3. CE650210 Environmental Engineering PC Theory 3 0 0 3
4. # Professional Elective III PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. # Professional Elective IV PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. $ Institute Elective II IE Theory 3 0 0 3
Contract Laws for Civil
7. CE650801 PM Theory 2 0 0 0
Engineers
Survey Field Practices
8. CE650305 PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
CE650306 Concrete and Highway
9. PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Engineering Laboratory
Integrated Aptitude Skills - I Skill Based
10. CE650503 EEC 0 0 2 1
(Higher) Course
Total 18 01 10 22

SEMESTER – VI

Course
Sl.No Course Name Classification L T P C
Code
CE660211 Structural Analysis II Theory with 2 0 2 3
1. PC
Practical
CE660212 Design of Steel Structures Theory with 2 1 0 3
2. PC
Project
3. CE660213 Construction Management PC Theory 3 0 0 3
4. # Professional Elective V PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. # Professional Elective VI PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. * Institute Elective III IE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. IM660403 Professional Ethics IM Theory 2 0 0 0
Environmental Engineering
8. CE660307 PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
Environmental and Irrigation
9. CE660308 PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Drawing Laboratory
Training in Centre for Skill Based
10. CE660504 EEC 0 0 2 1
Excellence Course
- Internship IM - - - -
Total 18 01 10 22

v
 SEMESTER – VII

Course
Sl.No Course Name Classification L T P C
Code
Design of RC Structures and Theory with
1. CE670214 PC 2 1 0 3
Detailing Project
Estimation, Costing and Theory with
2. CE670215 PC 2 0 2 3
Valuation Practical
Dynamics and Seismic
3. CE670216 PC Theory 3 0 0 3
Design of Structures
4. # Professional Elective VII PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. # Professional Elective VII PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. $ Institute Elective IV IE Theory 3 0 0 3
Innovation Entrepreneurship
7. MG670019 IC Theory 3 0 0 3
and Startups
Computer Aided Design and
8. CE670309 PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5
Drafting Laboratory

9. CE670310 Design Project PC Practical 0 0 3 1.5

Advanced Career Skill Based
10. CE670505 EEC 0 0 2 1
Development Course
Total 19 01 10 25

SEMESTER – VIII

Sl.No Course Code Course Name Classification L T P C

1. CE680506 Project Work PC Practical 0 0 20 10
Total 0 0 20 10

IC - Institute Core PE - Programme Elective

PC - Professional Core PM - Professional Mandatory
IM - Institute Mandatory
EEC - Employment Enhancement Course
IE - Institute Elective

Chairman / Board of Studies

Department of Civil Engineering
PSNCET (Autonomous)

vi
 PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
(Autonomous)

CURRICULUM – R 2022

B.E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

PROGRAMME ELECTIVES

VERTICAL 1 –STRUCTURES

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE606101 Prefabricated Structures PE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE606102 Prestressed Concrete Structures PE Theory 2 1 0 3
3. CE606103 Building Planning and Services PE Theory 3 0 0 3
4. CE606104 Tall Buildings PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. CE606105 Corrosion of RC Structures PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. CE606106 Computer Aided Design of Structures PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. CE606107 Maintenance and Repair of Concrete PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Structures
8. CE606108 Design of Masonry Structures (NPTEL) PE Theory 3 0 0 3
9. CE606109 Reinforced Concrete Road Bridges PE Theory 3 0 0 3
(NPTEL )
10. CE606110 Finite Element Method and Computational PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Structural Dynamics (NPTEL)

Vertical 2 – Constructions

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE606201 Construction Planning and Scheduling PE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE606202 Energy Conservation Methods in PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Construction
3. CE606203 Advanced Construction Techniques PE Theory 3 0 0 3
4. CE606204 Green Construction PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. CE606205 Environmental Impact Assessment for PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Construction Engineers
6. CE606206 Project Formulation and Appraisal PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. CE606207 Modern Construction Materials (NPTEL) PE Theory 3 0 0 3
8. CE606208 Basic Construction Materials PE Theory 3 0 0 3
9. CE606209 Development and Application of Special PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Concrete (NPTEL)
10. CE606210 Introduction to Lean Construction PE Theory 3 0 0 3
(NPTEL)

vii
 VERTICAL 3 – WATER RESOURCES & ENVIRONMENTAL

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE606301 Water Resources Engineering PE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE606302 Industrial Waste Management PE Theory 3 0 0 3
3. CE606303 Environmental Monitoring Instruments PE Theory 3 0 0 3
4. CE606304 Air Pollution & Control PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. CE606305 Environmental Impact Assessment PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. CE606306 Environmental Policy and Legislations PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. Ground Water Hydrology and PE Theory 3 0 0 3
CE606307
Management (NPTEL)
8. CE606308 Surface Water Hydrology PE Theory 3 0 0 3
9. CE606309 Computational Hydraulics (NPTEL) PE Theory 3 0 0 3
10. Rural Water Resources Management PE Theory 3 0 0 3
CE606310
(NPTEL)

VERTICAL 4 – SURVEYING

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE606401 Hydrographic Surveying PE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE606402 Geo- Informatics PE Theory 3 0 0 3
3. CE606403 Satellite Image Processing PE Theory 3 0 0 3
4. CE606404 Cartography PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. CE606405 Cadastral Surveying PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. CE606406 Higher Surveying PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. Geographic Information Systems PE Theory 3 0 0 3
CE606407
(NPTEL)
8. CE606408 Modern Surveying Techniques PE Theory 3 0 0 3
9. CE606409 GPS Surveying (NPTEL) PE Theory 3 0 0 3
10. Digital Land Surveying and Mapping PE Theory 3 0 0 3
CE606410
(NPTEL)

viii
 VERTICAL 5– SOIL & FOUNDATION

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE606501 Soil Dynamics PE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE606502 Advanced Foundation Engineering PE Theory 3 0 0 3
3. CE606503 Ground Improvement Techniques PE Theory 3 0 0 3
4. CE606504 Earthquake Resistant and Design of PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Foundations
5. CE606505 Geotechniques for Infrastructure PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. CE606506 Earth and Earth Retaining Structures PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. CE606507 Soil Structure Interaction PE Theory 3 0 0 3
8. CE606508 Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering PE Theory 3 0 0 3
(NPTEL)
9. CE606509 Unsaturated Soil Mechanics (NPTEL) PE Theory 3 0 0 3
10. CE606510 Geosynthetics Engineering - In Theory PE Theory 3 0 0 3
and Practice (NPTEL)

VERTICAL 6 – TRANSPORTATION

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE606601 Railway Infrastructure Planning and PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Design
2. CE606602 Airport Infrastructure Planning and PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Design
3. CE606603 Waterway Infrastructure Planning and PE Theory 3 0 0 3
Design
4. CE606604 Road Safety System PE Theory 3 0 0 3
5. CE606605 Intelligent Transportation Systems PE Theory 3 0 0 3
6. CE606606 Environmental Impacts of Transportation PE Theory 3 0 0 3
7. CE606607 Traffic Engineering and Management PE Theory 3 0 0 3
(NPTEL)
8. CE606608 Pavement Engineering PE Theory 3 0 0 3
9. CE606609 Urban Planning and Development PE Theory 3 0 0 3
(NPTEL)
10. CE606610 GIS for Transportation Systems (NPTEL) PE Theory 3 0 0 3

Chairman / Board of Studies

Department of Civil Engineering
PSNCET (Autonomous)

ix
 PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
(Autonomous)

CURRICULUM – R 2022

B.E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

INSTITUTE ELECTIVES

INSTITUTE ELECTIVE I

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE607103 Climate Change Adaptation and Mitigation IE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE607104 Sustainable Development IE Theory 3 0 0 3
3. CE607105 Watershed Conservation and Management IE Theory 3 0 0 3

INSTITUTE ELECTIVE II

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE607203 Environmental Risk Management IE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE607204 Energy Efficiency, Acoustics and Day IE Theory 3 0 0 3
Lighting in Building

INSTITUTE ELECTIVE III

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE607303 Plastic Waste Management IE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE607304 Waste to Energy Conversion IE Theory 3 0 0 3

INSTITUTE ELECTIVE IV

Sl. Course
Course Name Classification L T P C
No Code
1. CE607402 Electronic Waste Management IE Theory 3 0 0 3
2. CE607403 Environmental Quality Monitoring & IE Theory 3 0 0 3
Analysis

Chairman / Board of Studies

Department of Civil Engineering
PSNCET (Autonomous)

x
 PSN COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY
(Autonomous)

CURRICULUM – R 2022

B.E. – CIVIL ENGINEERING

SUMMARY SHEET

SEMESTER I II III IV V VI VII VIII Total

CREDIT 21 22 21.5 21.5 22 22 25 10 165

Chairman / Board of Studies

Department of Civil Engineering
PSNCET (Autonomous)

xi
III SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
 IC630017-NUMERICAL METHODS AND STATISTICS

L T P C
Course Category: Institute Core Course Type: Theory
2 1 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
With the present development of the computer technology, it is necessary to develop efficient
algorithms for solving problems in science, engineering and technology. This course gives a complete
procedure for solving different kinds of problems that occur in engineering numerically.

UNIT 1 - SOLUTION OF EQUATION AND EIGNVALUE PROBLEM 6+3

Solution of linear system of equation – Bijection method – fixed point Iteration method – Newton
Raphson Method – RagulaFalsi method – Decomposition Method – Gauss Elimination Method –
Gauss Jordan Method – Gauss Jacobi Method –Finding largest eigen value- Inverse of matrix by
Jordan Method.

UNIT 2 - INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATING POLYNOMIALS 6+3

Lagrangian polynomials – Divided difference formulae for equal intervals and unequal intervals –
Interpolating with a cubic spline – Newton’s forward and backward difference formulas – Stirlings
formula
UNIT 3 - NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 6+3
Differentiation using interpolation formulae – Numerical integration by trapezoidal and Simpson’s
1/3 and 3/8 rule – Romberg’s Method – Double integrals using trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules.
UNIT 4 - THEORY OF ESTIMATION 6+3
Estimation: Point and Interval estimates for population parameters of large sample and small samples,
determining the sample size.
UNIT 5 - TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 6+3
Sampling distributions – Testing of hypothesis for mean – variance –proportions and differences using
Normal–‘t’–Chi-square and F-distributions–Tests for independence of distributions of attributes and
goodness of fit.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

1
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Compute the solutions of the variables using iterative methods..
CO2: Understand and apply methods to find interpolating and approximating polynomials.
CO3: Solve complicated differentiation and integration by numerical methods.
CO4: Identify the type of estimations for small samples and large samples
CO5: Solve the physical problems by small and large sampling theory
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 1 - - -

CO2 2 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - - -

CO3 2 1 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - -

CO4 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -

CO5 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 - - -

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain “Numerical methods: for scientific and engineering
computation” 2013. 6th ed.,
2. Devore, J.L., “Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. S.C. Gupta and V.K. Kapoor “Fundamentals of mathematical statistics” Eleventh thoroughly
revised ed., Sultan Chand & Sons educational publishers, New Delhi (June 2003)
4. T. Veerarajan, “Probability, Statistics and Random Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi(2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sankararao.K “Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers” -3rd edition Printice Hall of
India Private Ltd. New Delhi-(2007).
2. Walpole, R.E., Myers, R.H., Myers, S.L. and YE. K., “Probability and Statistics For Engineers
and Scientists”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010
3. 3. Dr. Singaravelu, “ Numerical Methods” 19th Edition, Meenakshi Agency, Chennai (Dec
2012)
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://lecturenotes.in/subject/24/numerical-methods-nm
2. https://www.worldscientific.com/worldscibooks/10.1142/2884

2
 CE630201-SURVEYING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the basics of linear / angular measurement methods like chain surveying, compass
surveying.
• To measure the height and distance by theodolite and trigonometric.
• To know about tachometric surveying in distance and height measurements.
• To find the setting out of simple curves by linear and instrument method
• To Study the total station surveying
UNIT 1 - FUNDAMENTALS OF CONVENTIONAL SURVEYING AND LEVELLING 9
Classifications and basic principles of surveying - Equipment and accessories for ranging and chaining
- Methods of ranging - Compass - Types of Compass - Bearing - Types - True Bearing - Magnetic
Bearing - Levelling- Principles and theory of Levelling -Datum-BenchMarks-
TemporaryandPermanentAdjustments-MethodsofLevelling-Booking-Reduction Sources of errors in
Levelling – Curvature and refraction.

UNIT 2 - THEODOLITEANDTRIGNOMETRICLEVELLING 9
Introduction- Classification of theodolite- Temporary and permanent adjustments – Measurements of
horizontal and vertical angles- Theodolite traversing-Traversing computation-Balancing of traversing-
Introduction to omitted measurements. Trignometrical levelling: Heights and distances - Base of the
object accessible and In accessible.
UNIT 3 - TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING AND CONTOURS 9
Introduction-Instruments-Different systems of tachometric measurements- Tacheometer - Stadia
Constants - Analytic Lens -Tangential and Stadia Tacheometry surveying-Substense method: Vertical
and horizontal measurements. Contour - Contouring - Characteristics of contours - Methods of
contouring- Direct method-Indirect method- Contour gradient –Uses of contour plan and map-
Measurements of area and volume.
UNIT 4 - CURVESAND TRIANGULATION 9
Curves-Classifications-Elements of curves-Designation of curves-Setting out of simple curves: Linear
and instrument method. Triangulation- Classification-Basic systems- Operation-Signals and towers-
Satellite station.
UNIT 5 - TOTAL STATION & GPS 9
Total station: Study of Total Station-Features-Recording-Advantages-Field procedure- Measuring

3
Horizontal and vertical angles-Measurement of angles and height-Traversing using Total station and
Area of Traverse - Determination of distance and difference in elevation between two inaccessible
points using Total station. Global Positioning Systems: GPS elements- Application and uses-
Advantages.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Conduct linear and angular measurement survey with the help of chain, tape and compass.
CO2: Determine the horizontal and vertical distance by traversing using theodolite and measure
difference in elevation and produce reduced level of the given points.
CO3: Describe the methods of Tacheometric surveying and contouring.
CO4: Describe the methods of setting out curves in the field and to determine the area and volume
of structures.
CO5: Handle total station instrument for making the horizontal and vertical measurements.
Conduct the global positioning system for determining geographical location of the site
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - 2 - 3 1 3 - 1 - 2 3 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 - 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 3 -
CO5 2 1 1 - - 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. PunmiaB.C,“Surveying,Vol.I and II”, LaxmiPublications,16th Editions 2017
2. Basak N.N, “Surveying and Levelling”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd. 2nd
Edition, 2017.
3. Kumar S., “Basics of Remote sensing and GIS”, Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd,New edition,
2022.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Arora K. R, “Surveying Vol. I and II”, Standard Book House, 12th Edition, 2019.
2. Duggal S.K, “Surveying Vol. I and II”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2013.
3. Kanetkar T.P, “Surveying and Levelling Vols. I and II”, United Book Corporation, Pune, 1st
Edition, 2014.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/104/105104101/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107122
3. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/107/105107157/

4
 CE630202-CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY
L T P C
Course Type: Theory With
Course Category: Program Core
Practical Component 2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To have better knowledge about the chemical and mineral admixtures in concrete.
• To study the properties of concrete making materials.
• To familiarize with the IS method of mix design as per the latest code.
• To study the durability, corrosion and its preventive measures.
• To know the importance and applications of special concretes.

UNIT 1 - INGREDIENTSOFCONCRETE 6
Cement–constituents–Hydration-Types of cement-Test on cement as per BIS specifications-
Aggregates-Properties and tests as per BIS-Quality of water–Admixtures-Chemical admixture and
mineral admixture

UNIT 2 - PROPERTIESOFCONCRETE 6
Workability–Segregation–Bleeding–Strength–Stress-Strain characteristics–Modulus of Elasticity–
Shrinkage–Creep –Permeability–Destructive tests–Non Destructive Tests.
UNIT 3 - CONCRETEMIXDESIGN ANDQUALITY CONTROLOFCONCRETE 6
Statistical quality control- Sampling and testing–Acceptance criteria –Factors influencing. The design
mix – Mix Design by ACI and IS method.
UNIT 4 - DURABILITYANDCONCRETEUNDERSPECIALCIRCUMSTANCES 6
Durability–Chemical attack–Corrosion and its preventive measures-Underground Construction–
Extreme weather concreting.
UNIT 5 - SPECIALCONCRETES 6

High Strength concrete – High Performance Concrete – Reactive powder concrete – Lightweight
concrete-Mass concrete–Self Compacting Concrete–Polymer Concrete – Geopolymer Concrete–Fibre
Reinforced Concrete–Ready Mix Concrete–Ferrocement–Shortcrete–Vacuumconcrete

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Not Included for End Semester Examinations)
1. Determination of Consistency of Cement
2. Determination of Initial & Final Setting time of Cement
3. Determination of Compressive Strength of Cement

5
 4. Determination of Crushing Value of Coarse Aggregate
5. Determination the Workability of Concrete using Flow Table Apparatus
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS (30+15)

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Explain the suitability of ingredients of concrete and their testing methods.
CO2: Explain Properties of concrete and testing procedures of concrete in plastic and hardened
State.
CO3: Infer quality control and design concrete mixes by various methods.
CO4: Summarize durability of concrete and concreting under special circumstances.
CO5: Outline the properties of special concrete sand its applications.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 - - 2 - 1 - - - 2 - 2
CO2 1 2 3 - - 2 - 1 - - - 2 - 2
CO3 1 3 - - 2 2 - 1 - - - 2 2 -
CO4 1 2 3 - - 2 - 1 - - - 2 2 -
CO5 1 2 3 - - 2 - 1 - - - 2 - 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. S. Shetty & A K Jain “Concrete Technology: Theory and Practice”, S Chand Publishing, 8th
Edition, 2019.
2. M.L. Gambhir, “Concrete Technology Theory and Practice”, McGraw Hill Education, 5th
Edition, 2017.
3. Sachin Rohilla, Vipin Rohilla, “Concrete Technology”, S.K. Kataria& Sons, 1st Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. R. P. Rethaliya, “Concrete Technology”, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2018.
2. A.R. Santhakumar, “Concrete Technology”Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2018.
3. A.M. Neville, “Properties of Concrete”, Pearson publications, 5th Edition, 2011
4. IS10262-2019 Recommended Guidelines for Concrete Mix Design, Bureau of Indian,
Standards, New Delhi.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://old.amu.ac.in/emp/studym/1821.pdf
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/102/105102012/

6
 CE630203 -HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
L T P C
Course Type: Theory with
Course Category: Program Core
Project Component 3 0 3 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide a coherent development to sector of like transportation engineering.
• To study the cross sectional elements of highways
• To determine the flexible and rigid pavements.
• To study the highway construction materials, properties and testing methods.
• To learn the different pavement failure and evaluation systems.

UNIT 1 - HIGHWAY PLANNING AND ALIGNMENT 9

Significance of highway planning – Modal limitations towards sustainability – History of road
development in India – factors influencing highway alignment – Soil suitability analysis – Road ecology
– Engineering surveys for alignment, objectives, conventional and modern methods – Classification of
highways – Locations and functions – Typical cross-sections of Urban and Rural roads.

UNIT 2 - GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF HIGHWAYS 9

Cross sectional elements – Sight distances – Horizontal curves, Super elevation, transition curves,
widening at curves – Vertical curves – Gradients, Special consideration for hill roads – Hairpin bends
– Lateral and vertical clearance at underpasses – simple problems.
UNIT 3 - DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE AND RIGID PAVEMENTS 9
Pavement components and their role – Design principles -Design practice for flexible and rigid
Pavements (IRC methods only) – Embankments- Problems in Flexible pavement design.
UNIT 4 - HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 9
Highway construction materials, properties, testing methods – CBR Test for sub grade – tests on
aggregate & bitumen – Test on Bituminous mixes-Construction practice including modern materials
and methods, Bituminous and Concrete road construction, Polymer modified bitumen, Recycling,
Different materials – Glass, Fiber, Plastic, Geo-Textiles, Geo-Membrane (problem not included) –
Quality control measures – Highway drainage ––Construction machineries
UNIT 5 - HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE & REHABILITATION 9
Pavement failures: flexible pavement failures, rigid pavement failures, maintenance of different types
of pavements: assessment and need for maintenance, pavement management system, and evaluation of
pavements: structural evaluation of pavements, functional evaluation of pavements, strengthening of
existing pavements: object of strengthening, types of overlays, design of different types of overlays.

7
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Get knowledge on planning and aligning of highway.

CO2: Design the super elevation and curves.
CO3: Design the geometric features of road network and components of pavement
CO4: Know the highway construction materials, properties, testing methods
CO5: Perform pavement evaluation and management.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - 2 - 3 1 3 - 1 - 2 3 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 - 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 3 -
CO5 2 1 1 - - 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Khanna. S.K., Justo. C.E.G and Veeraragavan A."Highway Engineering "Publisher Nem Chand
& Sons,10th Edition2020.
2. Kadiyali.L.R."Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering", Khanna Technical
Publications, 6thEdition2015.
3. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering",Scitech
Publications, 7th Edition 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
IndianRoadCongress(IRC),GuidelinesfortheDesignofFlexiblePavements (ThirdRevision),IRC:37-2012
1. Indian Road Congress (IRC), Guidelines for the Design of Plain Jointed Rigid Pavements for
Highways, ( Third Revision), IRC:58-2012
2. Partha Chakraborty, Principles of Transportation Engineering, PHI learning, 2ndEdition 2013.
3. Sharma S. K, Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering Including Airport
Pavements, S. Chand Publishing, 2014
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.engineeringcivil.com/theory/highway-engineering
2. https://www.udemy.com/course/highway-engineering-full-course/

8
 CE630204 -GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING I
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge to classify the soil based on index properties and to assess their
engineering properties based on the classification.
• To familiarize the fundamental concepts of compaction, flow through soil
• To familiarize the concepts of stress transformation, stress distribution, consolidation and shear
strength of soils.
• To impart knowledge of design of both finite and infinite slopes.
UNIT 1 - SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND EFFECTIVE STRESS 9
Formation of soil - Soil description – Particle – Size, shape and colour – Composition of gravel, sand,
silt, clay particles – Particle behaviour – Soil structure – Phase relationship – Index properties –
Significance – BIS classification system – Unified classification system – Soil - water – Static pressure
in water - Total, neutral and effective stress – principle of effective stress -Effective stress concepts in
soils – Capillary phenomenon
UNIT 2 - COMPACTION AND PERMEABILITY 9
Compaction of soils –Theory, Laboratory and field tests – Field Compaction methods – Factors
influencing compaction of soils -Permeability interaction – Quick sand condition - Hydraulic
conductivity – Darcy’s law – Determination of Hydraulic Conductivity – Laboratory Determination
(Constant head and falling head methods) and field measurement pumping out in unconfined and
confined aquifer – Factors influencing permeability of soils.
UNIT 3 - STRESS DISTRIBUTION AND SETTLEMENT 9
Boussinesq’s and Westergaard’s theories for point load, uniformly loaded circular and rectangular
areas, pressure bulb, variation of vertical stress under point load along the 10 vertical and horizontal
plane, and Newmark’s influence chart for irregular areas. Consolidation settlement – Terzaghi’s one
dimensional consolidation theory – Computation of rate of settlement - √t and log t methods– e-log p
relationship
UNIT 4 - SHEAR STRENGTH 9
Importance of shear strength – Mohr’s– Coulomb Failure theories –Types of laboratory tests for
strength parameters – strength tests based on drainage conditions – strength envelops – Shear strength
of sands - dilatancy – critical void ratio.
UNIT 5 - SLOPE STABILITY 9

Types of slopes–Failure mechanism of slopes-Total and effective stress analysis–Finite slopes Stability
analysis for purely cohesive and – cohesion less soils – Method of slices - Friction circle method-
Taylor's Stability number - Slope protection methods..
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

9
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Demonstrate an ability to identify various types of soils and its properties, formulate and
solve engineering problems.
CO2: Show the basic application of flow through soil medium and its impact of engineering
solution.
CO3: Apply the basic concept of stress distribution in loaded soil medium and soil Settlement due
to consolidation.
CO4: Show the basic application of shear strength of soils and its impact of engineering Solutions
to the loaded soil medium and also will be aware of contemporary issues on shear Strength
of soils.
CO5: Demonstrate an ability to design the stability of slopes, component and process as per needs
and specifications.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - 2 - 3 1 3 - 1 - 2 3 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 - 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 3 -
CO5 2 1 1 - - 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers Distribution
Ltd., New Delhi. Kindle edition, 2018
2. 2Gopal Ranjan and Rao, A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age Ltd.
International Publisher New Delhi (India), 3rd Edition, 2016.
3. Jean-Louis Briaud, “Geotechnical Engineering: Unsaturated and Saturated Soils”,wiley
publication, 2nd edition, 2022.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 18th
edition, 2019
2. Das, B.M., “Principles of Geotechnical Engineering”. Brooks / Coles / Thompson Learning
Singapore, 8th Edition, 2013.
3. McCarthy, D.F., “Essentials of Soil Mechanics and Foundations”. Prentice-Hall, 7th edition,
2007.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.kobo.com/us/en/ebook/introduction-to-soil-mechanics
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105168

10
 CE630301- SURVEYING LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To train the students in taking field observations pertaining to some of the real world problems
such as triangulation, contouring, Total Station, Drones etc.,
• To train the students in all the related calculations and in the preparation of the required maps.
• To impart intensive training in the use of surveying instruments
• To train the students to appreciate practical difficulties in surveying on the field.
• To providing an opportunity to the students to develop team spirit.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of chains and its accessories, Aligning, Ranging, Chaining and Marking Perpendicular
offset
2. Compass Traversing – Measuring Bearings & arriving included angles
3. Reduction of levels (Check and Fly levelling) - Height of collimation and Rise and Fall method.
4. Measurements of horizontal angles by reiteration and repetition and vertical angles
5. Determination of elevation of an object using single plane method when base is
accessible/inaccessible.
6. Measurement of height and distance using stadia and tangential system of tachometry.
7. Setting out of a simple curve using linear method.
8. Measurement of angles and height by total station.
9. Traverse using Total station and Area of Traverse.
10. Determination of distance and difference in elevation between two inaccessible points using
Total station
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

11
 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
(For a batch of 30 students)
Sl. No. Description of Equipment’s Quantity
1. Theodolites At least 6 forevery30 students
2. Dumpy level At least 6 forevery30 students
3. Plain table At least 6 forevery30 students
4. Pocket stereoscope At least 6 forevery30 students
5. Ranging rods 5 no’s
6. Arrows 10 no’s
7. Leveling staff
8. Cross staff
9. Chains 1for a set of 5students
10. Tapes(20m&30m)
11. Total Station with Prism and Stand At least 6 forevery30 students
12. Prismatic compass At least 6 forevery30 students
13. Surveyor’s compass At least 6 forevery30 students
14. GPS (Hand Held) At least 6 forevery30 students
15. Drones 01 no

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Impart knowledge on the usage of basic surveying instruments like chain/tape, compass and
levelling instruments
CO2: Understand the levelling and its applications.
CO3: Execute a theodolite traverse.
CO4: Find heights and distances using tachometry surveying.
CO5: Use modern surveying instruments like total station and GPS, Drone.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 3 3 -
CO2 1 2 1 3 2 - - 1 2 2 - 3 3 1
CO3 1 3 1 2 2 - - - 2 - - 3 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 - 2 - - - 2 1 - 3 - 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 - - - 2 2 - 3 1 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

12
 1. T. P. Kanetkarand S. V. Kulkarni, Surveying and Levelling, Parts 1 & 2, Pune Vidyarthi Griha
Prakashan, Pune, 24th edition, 2015
2. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jainand Arun K Jain, Surveying Vol. I & II, Lakshmi Publications
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 17th Edition, 2016
3. James M. Anderson and Edward M. Mikhail, Surveying, Theory and Practice, 7 th Edition,
McGraw Hill 2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol. I & II, Standard Book house, 11th Edition, 2013

2. S. K. Roy, Fundamentals of Surveying, 2nd Edition, Prentice ‘Hall of India 2004

3. David Clark and James Clendening, Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, Volume II,
Constable and Company Ltd, London, CBS, 6th Edition, 2004.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://sl-iitr.vlabs.ac.in/
2. https://sl-iitr.vlabs.ac.in/List%20of%20experiments.html

13
 CE630302 – COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on Software capabilities for drafting and modelling
• To impart knowledge on Different types of buildings & their views
• To draw the Isometric, 2D and 3D views of the simple objects
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART A
1. Symbols and Conventions in building drawing
2. Drafting and annotation commands.
3. Simple Drawings I
4. Drawings using advanced commands
5. Simple Drawings II
PART B
6. Planning of building based on as per building bye laws.
7. Joinery Details (Doors &Windows)
8. Plan, Section and Elevation of load bearing walls (Flat roof)
9. Plan, Section and Elevation of load bearing walls (Sloped roof)
10. Plan, Section and Elevation of RCC framed structures
11. Plan, Section and Elevation of Industrial buildings
12. Perspective view of Residential buildings
13. Requirements of Drawings as per National Building Code
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

14
 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
(For a batch of 30 students)

Sl. No. Description of Equipment’s Quantity

1. Computer system of Pentium IV or equivalent 1 for each student
Licensed version of any reputed Analysis, Design & 1 copy for a set of 3
2.
Drafting software students

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Draft drawings by using software.

CO2: Understand different type of construction elements in a building.
CO3: Learn the drawing as per National Building code.
CO4: Describe knowledge about building components.
CO5: Draw plan, section & elevation of different types of buildings & structures.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 - - - 3 - 2 - - 3 - 2 2 2
CO2 2 - - 2 3 - 2 2 - 2 - 3 2 2
CO3 3 - 3 3 3 - 3 1 3 - - 3 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 3 3 - 2 1 - 2 - 2 2 2
CO5 2 - 2 2 3 - - - 2 3 - 3 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Civil Engg. Drawing & House Planning – B.P. Verma, Khanna publishers, Delhi, 2006
2. Building drawing & detailing – Dr.Balagopal & T.S. Prabhu, Spades Publishers, Calicut, 2012.
3. Subhash C Sharma &Gurucharan Singh, ―Civil Engineering Drawing‖, Standard Publishers,
7th Edition, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.P. Verma, ―Civil Engineering Drawing, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Dr. N. Kumara Swamy, A. KameswaraRao. “Building Planning and Drawing”, Charotar
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 7th Edition, 2014.
3. V.B Sikka, “A Course in Civil Engineering Drawing”, S.K. Kataria& Sons, Delhi, 2012.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019
2. https://civilguru.net/computer-aided-drawing-book-pdf-2/

15
 CE630501 – INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (LOWER)
L T P C
Course Type: Practical
Course Category: EEC
(Skill Based Course) 0 0 1 0.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basic concepts of quantitative ability
• To understand the basic concepts of logical reasoning Skills
• To acquire satisfactory competency in use of verbal reasoning

UNIT 1 - QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE 10

1. Numbers – Number Systems, Types of Numbers, Series (Arithmetic Progression, Geometric
Progression)
2. Problem on Ages
3. HCF & LCM
4. Profit & Loss
5. Problems on Trains, Boats & Stream
6. Calendar & Clocks
7. Time & Work
8. Speed & Distance (Or) Time & Distance
9. Decimal Fractions, Simplification (Including Expression & Evaluation)
10. Square Root, Cubic Root
11. Average
12. Surds & Indices
13. Odd Man Out & Series
UNIT 2 - LOGICAL REASONING 10
1. Series completion
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Coding-Decoding
5. Blood Relation
6. Puzzle test
7. Sequential Output Tracing
8. Direction sense test
9. Logical Venn Diagram
10. Alphabet Test
11. Alpha-numeric sequence Puzzle
12. Number, Ranking and Time sequence Test
13. Mathematical Operations
14. Logical Sequence of words
15. Arithmetical Reasoning
16. Inserting the mission character

16
 17. Data Sufficiency
18. Eligibility test
19. Assertions and Reasoning
20. Situation Reaction Test
21. Verification of truth of the statement
UNIT 3 - VERBAL ABILITY 10
1. Vocabulary Based - Synonyms
2. Vocabulary Based - Antonyms
3. Spotting Errors
4. Spelling
5. Jumbled words
6. One word substitution
7. Sentence Correction
8. Idioms & Phrases.
9. Commonly confusing words
10. Statement and Conclusion
11. Change of Voice
12. Facts/Inferences and Judgment
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Develop strong foundational skills in mathematics, enabling them to confidently solve a
variety of numerical and logical problems encountered in real-world scenarios.
CO2: Develop strong logical reasoning and analytical skills, enabling them to solve a wide range
of problems encountered in competitive exams, aptitude tests, and real-life situations.
CO3: Develop a comprehensive understanding of English language usage, grammar, and
vocabulary, enabling them to communicate effectively in both written and spoken contexts,
as well as to analyze and evaluate written material critically as well as analyze and evaluate
written material critically

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation
TEXT BOOKS:

1. Agarwal R.S, “Quantitative Aptitude,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, First
Edition 1989, Reprint, 2016.
2. Agarwal R.S, “A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning,” S.Chand and
Company Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, First Edition 1994, Reprint, 2016.
3. Agarwal R.S, “Objective General English,” S.Chand and Company Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, First

17
 Edition 1997, Reprint, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Anand P A, “Quantitative Aptitude,” Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Edition,2016
2. Arun Sharma, “How to Prepare for Logical Reasoning,” Tata-McGraw Hill Education
Series.New Delhi, First Edition 2016.
3. Sharon Weiner Green, Ira K Wolf, “Barron’s GRE,” Barron Publishers. First Edition 1995,
Reprint, 2016.
4. The Princeton Review, “Cracking the GRE”, Random House Publisher, Premium Edition 2016.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. www.indiabix.com.
2. http://www.practiceaptitudetests.com

18
 IM630402-UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES
L T P C
Course Category: Institutive
Course Type: Theory
Mandatory 2 0 0 0
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To help students distinguish between values and skills, and understand the need, basic
guidelines, content and process of value education
• To help students initiate a process of dialog within themselves to know what they ‘really want
to be’ in their life and profession
• To help students understand the meaning of happiness and prosperity for a human being.
• To facilitate the students to understand harmony at all the levels of human living, and live
accordingly.
• To facilitate the students in applying the understanding of harmony in existence in their
profession and lead an ethical life.
UNIT 1 - COURSE INTRODUCTION - NEED, BASIC GUIDELINES, CONTENT AND 6
PROCESS FOR VALUE EDUCATION
Need for Value Education, basic guidelines, content and process for Value - the basic requirements for
fulfilment of aspirations of every human being with their correct priority. Right Understanding,
relationship and Physical Facility. Happiness and Prosperity correctly- understanding and living in
harmony at various levels. Process of Value Education – Self-exploration.

UNIT 2 - UNDERSTANDING HARMONY IN THE HUMAN BEING 6

Understanding the needs of Self (‘I’) and ‘Body’ - Sukh and Suvidha. Understanding the Body as an
instrument of ‘I’ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer). Understanding the characteristics and activities
of ‘I’ and harmony in ‘I’. Understanding the harmony of I with the Body: Sanyam and Swasthya;
correct appraisal of Physical needs, meaning of Prosperity in detail Programs to ensure Sanyam and
Swasthya
UNIT 3 - UNDERSTANDING HARMONY IN THE FAMILY 6
Understanding harmony in the Family- the basic unit of human interaction. Understanding values in
human-human relationship - the foundational values of relationship. Difference between intention and
competence. Understanding the meaning of Samman, Difference between respect and differentiation;
the other salient values in relationship.
UNIT 4 - UNDERSTANDING THE HARMONY IN THE SOCIETY 6
Understanding the harmony in the society (society being an extension of family): Samadhan, Samridhi,
Abhay, Sah-astitva as comprehensive Human Goals. Health and self-regulation. Harmony from Family
Order to World Family Order – Process of Development of a Child – In an environment of Relationship.

19
UNIT 5 - UNDERSTANDING HARMONY IN THE NATURE 6

Understanding the harmony in the Nature. Interconnectedness, Self-regulation and Mutual Fulfilment
among the Four. Realizing Existence as Co-existence at All Levels. Holistic perception of harmony
at all levels of existence.

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Understand the significance of value inputs in a classroom and start applying them in their
life and profession
CO2: Distinguish between values and skills, happiness and accumulation of physical facilities,
the Self and the Body, Intention and Competence of an individual, etc.
CO3: Understand the value of harmonious relationship based on trust and respect in their life and
profession
CO4: Understand the role of a human being in ensuring harmony in society and nature.
CO5: Distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and start working out the strategy to
actualize a harmonious environment wherever they work.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 3 - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 -
CO3 2 3 - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 -
CO4 3 2 - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 -
CO5 2 1 - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 --
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. R R Gaur, R Sangal, G P Bagaria, 2009, A Foundation Course in Human Values and

Professional Ethics.
2. Ivan Illich, 1974, Energy & Equity, The Trinity Press, Worcester, and Harper Collins, USA
3. E.F. Schumacher, 1973, small is Beautiful: a study of economics as if people mattered, Blond
& Briggs Britain.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sussan George, 1976, How the Other Half Dies, Penguin Press. Reprinted 1986, 1991
2. Donella H. Meadows, Dennis L. Meadows, Jorgen Randers, William W. Behrens III, 1972,
Limits to Growth – Club of Rome’s report, Universe Books.
3. A Nagraj, 1998, JeevanVidyaEkParichay, Divya Path Sansthan, Amarkantak.
4. AICTE, FDP –Course material.

20
IV SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
 IC630018-BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS AND PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION
L T P C
Course Category: Institute Core Course Type: Theory
2 1 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Objective of the subject is to provide a venue for the promotion, encouragement, and interdisciplinary
collaboration of various fields using the theory, techniques, and applications of boundary value
problems and Make predictions about the likelihood of specific events using the probability distribution
for discrete random variables (general, binomial,). Students will use the normal distribution's
fundamentals to calculate probability. Implement a normal distribution. Check out a normal
distribution.
UNIT 1 - INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL 6+3
EQUATIONS
Single Step Methods: Taylor Series Method Euler Method for First Order Equation Fourth Order
Runge Kutta Method for Solving First and Second Order Equations Multistep Methods: Milnes and
Adams Predictor and Corrector Methods
UNIT 2 - BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL 6+3
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Finite Difference Solution of Second Order Ordinary Differential Equation Finite Difference Solution
of One Dimensional Heat Equation by Explicit and Implicit Methods One Dimensional Wave
Equation and Two Dimensional Laplace and Poisson Equations.
UNIT 3 - PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 6+3
Random experiment sample space concept of probability Axioms of Probability conditional
probability Total probability - Bayes theorem - Discrete and continuous type of random variables -
Moments - Moment generating functions and their properties.
UNIT 4 - STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS 6+3
Discrete distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Negative Binomial Continuous distributions -
Uniform, Normal, Exponential, Gamma, and Weibull distributions Mean and variance of distribution
Method of finding Mean and variance using MGF.
UNIT 5 - TWO DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 6+3
Joint distributions - Marginal and conditional distributions -Independent random variables -
Covariance - Correlation and Regression - Transformation of random variables - Central limit theorem
with its applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

21
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply the method of finding numerical solution for differential equation by initial value.
problems and terminal problem
CO2: Apply the method of finding numerical solution for differential equation by boundary value
problems and with their application.
CO3: Gain knowledge about conditional probability and applications of Bayes theorem.
CO4: Identify the different types of distribution and apply in real life.
CO5: Apply the discrete data to analyse the correlation and regression.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 3
CO2 3 3 1 2 1 3 - - - - - - 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 - 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 3 - - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain “Numerical methods: for scientific and engineering
computation” 2013. 6th ed.,
2. M.K. Jain “Numerical solutions to differential equation” Wiley Eastern New Delhi 2015.
3. Devore, J.L., “Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
4. S.C. Gupta and V.K. Kapoor “Fundamentals of mathematical statistics” Elevanth thoroughly
revised ed., Sultan Chand & Sons educational publishers, New Delhi (June 2003)
5. T. Veerarajan, “Probability, Statistics and Random Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi(2006)
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Veerarajan.T and Ramachandran. T Numerical Methods with Programming in C second Ed.,

Tata Mc. Graw Hill Publishing. Co. Ltd (2007)
2. Sankararao.K Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers -3rd edition Printice Hall of
India Private Ltd. New Delhi-(2007).
3. Walpole, R.E., Myers, R.H., Myers, S.L. and YE. K., Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.worldscientific.com/worldscibooks/10.1142/2884

22
 CE640205-MECHANICS OF MATERIALS
L T P C
Course Type: Theory with
Course Category: Program Core
Practical 2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the fundamental concepts of stress in simple and complex states.
• To know the mechanism of load transfer in beams and the induced stresses due to simple
bending.
• To determine the deformation beams.
• To determinate beams and to know the basic concepts of analysis of indeterminate beams.
• To know the mechanism of load transfer in beams and the induced stresses due unsymmetrical
bending.

UNIT 1 - SIMPLE STRESSES AND STRAINS 6

Concept of stress and strain, stress and strain diagram, Hooke’s law, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s
ratio, stress at a point, stresses and strains in bars subjected to axial loading, Modulus of elasticity,
stress produced in compound bars subjected to axial loading. Temperature stress and strain
calculations due to applications of axial loads and variation of temperature in single and compound
walls. Torsion on circular shafts.

UNIT 2 - BENDING OF BEAMS 6

Types of beams and transverse loadings - Shear force and bending moment for simply supported,
cantilever and over-hanging beams (concentrated loads, uniformly distributed loads & uniformly
varying loads over the whole span or part of span) - Theory of simple bending – Bending stress
distribution – Section modulus - Shear stress distribution.
UNIT 3 - DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 6
Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment method – Conjugate beam method
- Strain energy method for determinate beams.
UNIT 4 - INDETERMINATE BEAMS 6
Propped Cantilever and Fixed Beams – Fixed end moments reactions, slope and deflection for standard
cases of loading –– Continuous beams – support reactions and moments –Theorem of three moments
– Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams.
UNIT 5 - ADVANCED TOPICS 6

23
Unsymmetrical bending of beams - shear center applied - Thick cylinders - Theories of failure –
Principal stress, principal strain, shear stress, strain energy and distortion energy theories – application
problems – deflection of helical spring.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Not Included for End Semester Examinations)
1. Determination of the hardness of the given material by brinell hardness test

2. Determination of the hardness of the given material by Shore D hardness test

3. Determination of the Impact strength on mild steel by impact testing machine( Izod)

4. Determination of Impact strength on mild steel by impact testing machine (Chorpy)

5. Determination of the stiffness, rigidity modulus and spring index using spring testing
machine.
6. Determination of the flexural rigidity value of cantilever beam by deflection test.

7. Determination of the flexural rigidity value of simply supported beam by deflection test.
8. Determination of the tensile strength of mild steel rod.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS (30+15)
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the concepts of stress and strain.
CO2: Determine Shear force and bending moment in beams and understand concept of theory of
simple bending.
CO3: Calculate the deflection of beams by different methods and selection of method for
determining slope or deflection.
CO4: Analyze propped cantilever, fixed beams and continuous beams for external loadings and
support settlements.
CO5: Determine the stresses due to Unsymmetrical bending of beams, locate the shear center, and
study the various theories of failure.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

24
 1. Rajput R.K."Strength of Materials (Mechanics of Solids)", S.K. Kataria&Sons7th Edition 2020.
2. Rattan.S.S, "Strength of Materials", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd
Edition 2017.
3. Bansal R. K, Strength of Materials - Mechanics of Solids (S.I. Units), Laxmi Publications, 6th
Edition 2020.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Punmia B.C.,Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain," Theory of Structures" (SMTS)Vol-
II,Laxmi Publishing Pvt Ltd,NewDelhi2012.
2. William A .Nash, “Theory and Problems of Strength of Materials”, Schaum’s Outline
Series,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company, 2017.
3. Beer. F.P. & Johnston.E.R. “Mechanics of Materials”, Tata McGraw Hill, Sixth Edition, New
Delhi 2010.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.udemy.com/course/strength-of-materials-part-i/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107146

25
 CE640206 -FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY
L T P C
Course Type: Theory with
Course Category: Program Core
Practical 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To find fluid properties and theory of fluid at rest.
• To know the basics of fluid in motion and about the measurement of flow.
• To study the fundamentals of pipe flow, major and various minor losses encountered in the pipe
flow.
• To find the boundary layer formation and prevention, and hydraulic model studies.
• To study the theories of different types of turbines and pumps.
UNIT 1 - FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLUID STATICS 9
Scope of fluid mechanics - Definitions of a fluid - Methods of analysis - Dimensions and units -
Viscosity, density, vapour pressure ,surface tension, capillarity - Basic equation of fluid statics -
Pressure measurements - Manometers. - Buoyancy and floatation - Stability of floating bodies -
Relative equilibrium.

UNIT 2 - FLUID KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS 9

Kinematics - Methods of describing fluid motion - Classification of flows and flow lines - Equation
of continuity - Stream function and velocity potential function - Basics of flow nets Dynamics of fluid
flow - Equation of energy momentum - Euler’s equation of motion along a stream line - Bernoulli’s
equation - Applications to velocity and discharge measurements - Venturimeter, orifice meter and
pitot tube.
UNIT 3 - FLOW THROUGH PIPES 9
Laminar flow through pipes - Development of laminar and turbulent flows in pipes - Reynolds
experiment - Hagen Poiseullie equation - Darcy-Weisbach equation - Moody diagram - Major and
minor losses of flow in pipes - Pipes in series and in parallel - Equivalent pipes - Power transmission
through pipes-Water hammer in pipes- Flow through open channel- Stream discharge measurement.
UNIT 4 - BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY AND DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 9
Definition of boundary layer - Thickness and classification - Displacement , momentum and energy
thickness - Boundary layer separation and prevention - Fundamental and derived units - Dimensional
homogeneity - Similarities - Model studies - Dimensionless numbers - Hydraulic similitude –
Modellaws – Reynold’s model law – Froude’s model law - Undistorted and distorted models - Scale
effect
UNIT 5 - TURBINES AND PUMPS 9

26
Turbines - Classification - Pelton wheel - Francis turbine - Propeller and Kaplan turbines - draft tube
and cavitation - Performance of turbine - Specific speed - Centrifugal pumps - Minimum speed to start
the pump - NPSH - Cavitation in pumps - Operating characteristics - Multistage pumps – Jet pump
and submersible pumps (working principle only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Compute fluid properties, pressure and stability of floating bodies.
CO2: Compute the rate of fluid flowing through pipes.
CO3: Compute the major and minor losses occurring in pipe flow.
CO4: Compute the scale ratio for the hydraulic models.
CO5: Relate the operational conditions and efficiencies of different turbines and pumps.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO2 3 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO4 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO5 3 3 1 2 - 1 - - - - - - 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. R.K.Bansal, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi publications, New Delhi
2018.
2. Er. R.K. Rajput, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines", S.Chand & Co., 2016.
3. KumarK.L.,“EngineeringFluidMechanics”,S.ChandPublishing(P)Ltd.,NewDelhi,(2014)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Subramanian. K, Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”, Tata McGraw – Hill
Education (India), 2009.
2. Jain A. K. "Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”, Khanna Publishers, 1998.
3. ModiP.N and Seth, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics including Hydraulic Machines”,
Standard Book House, New Delhi, 2017.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105203
2. https://www.engineerclassroom.com/2019/01/a-textbook-of-fluid- mechanics-and_18.html

27
 CE640207-GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING II
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the soil characteristics
• To study and understand various theories and principles governing earth pressures and
retaining wall design
• To study &understanding of foundation design principles, ensuring the safe and stable
performance of structures on various soil types.
• To learn the tools necessary to effectively design, analyze, and implement pile foundations for
a wide range of engineering applications.
• To select, design, and construct foundations that meet structural requirements, ensure stability,
and withstand various environmental and loading conditions.

UNIT 1 - SOIL EXPLORATION AND SELECTION OF FOUNDATION 9

Scope and objectives – Methods of exploration – Auguring and boring – Wash boring and rotary
drilling – Depth and spacing of bore holes – Soil samples – Representative and undisturbed – Sampling
methods – Split spoon sampler, Thin wall sampler, Stationary piston sampler– Data interpretation -
Strength parameters and Evaluation of Liquefaction potential - Selection of foundation based on soil
condition- Bore log report.

UNIT 2 - EARTH PRESSURE THEORIES AND RETAINING WALLS 9

At-rest earth pressures, Rankine’s theory of earth pressure – earth pressures in layered soils–
Coulomb’s earth pressure theory – Culmann’s graphical method, effect of pore water, earth pressure
due to surcharge loads. Types of retaining walls – stability of gravity and cantilever retaining walls
against overturning, sliding and, bearing capacity modes of failure, Drainage from backfill,
introduction to reinforced earth walls.
UNIT 3 - BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9
Introduction – Location and Depth of Foundation – Codal Provisions – Bearing Capacity of Shallow
Foundation on homogeneous deposits – Terzaghi’s Formula and BIS Formula – Factors Affecting
Bearing Capacity – Bearing Capacity from in-situ Tests (SPT, SCPT and Plate Load) – Allowable
Bearing Pressure – Seismic Considerations in Bearing Capacity. Evaluation. Determination of
Settlement of Foundations on Granular and Clay Deposits –Total and Differential Settlement –
Allowable Settlements – Codal Provision – Methods of Minimizing Total And Differential
Settlements.

28
UNIT 4 - PILE FOUNDATION 9
Types of piles and their functions – factors influencing the selection of pile – carrying capacity of
Single pile in granular and cohesive soil – static formula – dynamic formulae (Engineering News and
Hileys) – capacity from insitu tests (SPT, SCPT) – negative skin friction – uplift capacity- group
Capacity by different methods (field’s rule, converse – labarra formula and block failure criterion) –
Settlement of pile groups – interpretation of pile load test (routine test only), under reamed piles –
Capacity under compression and uplift – codal Provision, Geosynthetics and Soil Reinforcement.
UNIT 5 - FOOTINGS AND RAFTS 9
Types of isolated footing, combined footing, mat foundation – contact pressure and settlement
Distribution – proportioning of foundations for conventional rigid behavior – minimum depth for rigid
Behavior – applications – floating foundation – special foundations – seismic force consideration –
codal provision
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate an ability to plan and execute a detailed site investigation to select
geotechnical design parameters and type of foundation.
CO2: Demonstrate an ability to design retaining walls and to apply the concept of earth pressure
theories, its component or process as per the needs and specifications.
CO3: Demonstrate an ability to design shallow foundations, its component or process as per the
needs and specifications.
CO4: Demonstrate an ability to design deep foundations, its component or process as per the
needs and specifications.
CO5: Demonstrate an ability to design combined footings and raft foundations, its component or
process as per the needs and specifications.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO3 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 - - 1 1 2 1 2 1
CO5 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers and
Distributers Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao A.S.R. “Basic and Applied soil mechanics”, New Age International (P)
Ltd, New Delhi, 2006.

29
 3. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics And Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi,
2017
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Das,B.M.“Principles of Foundation Engineering” (Eighth Edition), Thompson Asia Pvt.Ltd.
Singapore, 2017.
2. Kaniraj, S.R. “Design Aids in Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Tata Mcgraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
3. Varghese, P.C.,”Foundation Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi,
2012.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105203
2. https://www.engineerclassroom.com/2019/01/a-textbook-of-fluid- mechanics-and_18.html

30
 CE640303 – HYDRAULICS LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide hands on experience in calibration of flow meters.
• To perform the characteristics of pumps.
• To perform the characteristics of turbines.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for venturi meter.
2. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for orifice meter.
3. Determination of co-efficient of discharge V-Notch and Mouthpieces.
4. Calibration of rotameter
5. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
6. Determination of friction losses in pipes. .
7. Determination of minor losses in pipes.
8. Determination of Metacentric height.
9. Determination of performance characteristics of centrifugal pumps (Constant speed) –
Single stage.
10. Determination of performance characteristics of centrifugal pumps (variable speed) –
Single stage.
11. Determination of performance on reciprocating pump.
12. Determinations of performance characteristics of deep well pump (Submersible).
13. Determination of performance characteristics of deep well pump (Jet pump).
14. Determination of performance characteristics of gear oil pump.
15. Determination of performance on Pelton turbine.
16. Determination of performance on Francis turbine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LIST OF REQUIREMENTS
S.No Description of Equipment’s Quantity
1. Venturimeter with all accessories 1 Unit
2. Orifice Meter with all accessories 1 Unit

31
 3. Flow measurement-open channel flow(Channel with provision for 1 Unit
Fixing notches, Rectangular, triangular & trapezoidal forms)
4. Bernoulli’s theorem– Verification Apparatus with assembly 1No
5. Ship model with accessories 1No
6. Major loss–Friction loss with assembly 1 Unit
7. Minor Losses with assembly 1 Unit
8. Centrifugal pump assembly with accessories(single stage) 1 Unit
9. Gear oil pump assembly set with accessories 1 Unit
10. Reciprocating pump assembly with accessories 1 Unit
11. Deep well pump (Submersible & jet) assembly set with accessories 1 Unit
12. Pelton Impulse turbine assembly with fittings & accessories 1 Unit

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply Bernoulli equation for calibration of flow measuring devices.
CO2: Measure friction factor in pipes.
CO3: Determine the performance characteristics of roto dynamic pumps.
CO4: Determine the performance characteristics of positive displacement pumps.
CO5: Determine the performance characteristics of turbines.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bansal R.K., Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, 10th Edition
2019.
2. Khurmi R. S. Text Book of Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Machinery, S. Chand Limited,
10th Edition 2000.
3. Rajput R. K, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, S Chand & Co Ltd, 6th Edition 2016

32
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hydraulic Laboratory Manual, Centre for Water Resources, Anna University, 2015.
2. Modi P.N. and Seth S.M., Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics. Standard Book House. New Delhi,
22nd Edition, 2019.
3. Subramanya K, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Edu. Pvt. Ltd.
2nd Edition, 2018.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://eerc03-iiith.vlabs.ac.in/
2. https://www.aboutcivil.org/fluid-mechanics-hydraulics-lab-experiments.html

33
 CE640304- GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To gain experience regarding the determination of properties of different types of soils.
• To provide an opportunity to learn how to measure the shear strength of the soil and its
importance.
• To impart knowledge about the foundation engineering.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. DETERMINATION OF INDEX PROPERTIES
A. Specific gravity of soil solids
B. Moisture content
C. Grainsize distribution–Sieve analysis
D. Grainsize distribution -Hydrometer analysis
E. Liquid limit and Plastic limit tests
F. Shrinkage limit
2. DETERMINATION OF INSITU DENSITY AND COMPACTION
CHARACTERISTICS
A. Field density Test ( Sand replacement method)
B. Field density Test (Core cutter method)
C. Determination of moisture– density relationship using standard proctor compaction test.
3. DETERMINATION OF ENGINEERING PROPERTIES
A. Permeability determination (constant head and falling head methods)
B. One dimensional consolidation test (Determination of co-efficient of consolidation only)
C. Direct shear test in cohesion less soil
D. Unconfined compression test in cohesive soil
E. Laboratory vane shear test in cohesive soil.
F. Tri-axial compression test in cohesion less soil (Demonstration only)
G. California Bearing Ratio Test
4. TEST ON GEOSYNTHETICS (Demonstration only)
A. Determination of tensile strength and inter facial friction angle.
B. Determination of apparent opening sizes and permeability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

34
 LIST OF REQUIREMENTS
S.No Description of Equipment’s Quantity
1 Sieves 2sets
2. Hydrometer 2sets
3. Liquid and Plastic limit apparatus 3sets

4. Shrinkage limit apparatus 3sets

5. Thermometer 3sets

6. Sand replacement method accessories 2sets

7. Core cutter method accessories 2sets

8. Proctor Compaction apparatus 2sets
9. Relative Density apparatus 2sets

10. Permeability determination 1

i. Constant head method 1
ii. Falling head method
11. Three Gang Consolidation test device 1
12. Direct Shear apparatus 1
13. UTM of minimum of 20kN capacity 1
14. Vane Shear apparatus 1
15. Triaxial shear apparatus 1
16. California bearing ratio test apparatus 1
17. Weighing machine 20 capacity 1
18. Weighing machine– 1kg capacity 3
19. Moisture cans 10
20. Oven 1

35
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Conduct tests to determine the index properties of soil.
CO2: Determine the insitu density and compaction characteristics.
CO3: Find the compressibility, permeability of the soil
CO4: Determine the shear strength of soil.
CO5: Understand the various tests on Geosynthetics

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 3 3
CO2 1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 2 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Soil Engineering Laboratory Instruction Manual” published by Engineering College Co-

operative Society, Anna University, Chennai, 2010.
2. “Saibaba Reddy, E. Ramasastri, K. “Measurement of Engineering Properties of Soils”, new
age International (P) limited publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Lambe T.W., “Soil Testing for Engineers”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1951. Digitized
2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. IS Code of Practice (2720) Relevant Parts, as amended from time to time, Bureau of Indian
Standards, and New Delhi.
2. G.Venkatappa Rao and Goutham .K. Potable, “Geosynthetics Testing – A laboratory Manual”,
Sai Master Geoenvironmental Services Pvt. Ltd., 1st Edition 2008.
3. Braja M. Das., “Soil Mechanics: Laboratory Manual”, Oxford University Press, eighth edition,
2012
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ce60/preview

36
 CE640502 – INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - II (LOWER)
L T P C
Course Type: Practical
Course Category: EEC
(Skill Based Course) 0 0 1 0.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basic concepts of quantitative ability
• To understand the basic concepts of logical reasoning Skills
• To acquire satisfactory competency in use of verbal reasoning

UNIT 1 - QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE 10

1. Percentage
2. Ratio & Proportions
3. Pipes & Cisterns
4. Permutations & Combinations
5. Partnership
6. Alligation (Or) Mixture
7. Races & Games
8. Stocks & Shares
9. Height & Distance
10. True Discount & Banker’s Discount
11. Probability
12. Mensuration (Area, Volume & Surface Area)
13. Interest (Simple Interest, Compound Interest)
14. Logarithm
15. Chain Rule
16. Data Interpretation (Tabulation, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, Line Graphs)

UNIT 2 - LOGICAL REASONING 10

VERBAL REASONING:
Logical Deduction
1. Logic
2. Statement – Argument
3. Statement – Assumptions
4. Statement –Courses of action
5. Statement –Conclusion
6. Deriving Conclusion from passages

37
 7. Theme Detection
8. Cause and Effect reasoning
NON-VERBAL REASONING
1. Series
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Analytical Reasoning
5. Mirror – Images
6. Water – Images
7. Spotting out the embedded figures
8. Completion of incomplete patterns
9. Figure Matrix
10. Paper Folding
11. Paper Cutting
12. Rule Detection
13. Grouping of identical figures
14. Cubes and Dice
15. Dot Situation
16. Construction of squares and triangles
17. Figure formation and analysis
UNIT 3 - VERBAL ABILITY 10
1. Concord
2. Cloze Passage
3. Analogies or Reverse Analogies
4. Jumbled Sentences.
5. Error Deduction.
6. Reading Comprehension
7. Paragraph Formation
8. Completing Statements
9. Usage of Prepositions
10. Inference(Theme Detection)
11. Verification of Truth from the Statements
12. Change of Speech
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

38
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Develop strong foundational skills in mathematics, enabling them to confidently solve a
variety of numerical and logical problems encountered in real-world scenarios.
CO2: Develop strong logical reasoning and analytical skills, enabling them to solve a wide range
of problems encountered in competitive exams, aptitude tests, and real-life situations.
CO3: Develop a comprehensive understanding of English language usage, grammar, and
vocabulary, enabling them to communicate effectively in both written and spoken contexts,
as well as to analyze and evaluate written material critically as well as analyze and evaluate
written material critically

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Agarwal R.S, “Quantitative Aptitude,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, First
Edition 1989, Reprint, 2016.
2. Agarwal R.S, “A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning,” S.Chand and
Company Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, First Edition 1994, Reprint, 2016.
3. Agarwal R.S, “Objective General English,” S.Chand and Company Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, First
Edition 1997, Reprint, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Anand P A, “Quantitative Aptitude,” Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Edition,2016
2. Arun Sharma, “How to Prepare for Logical Reasoning,” Tata-McGraw Hill Education Series.
New Delhi, First Edition 2016.
3. Sharon Weiner Green, Ira K Wolf, “Barron’s GRE,” Barron Publishers. First Edition 1995,
Reprint, 2016.
4. The Princeton Review, “Cracking the GRE”, Random House Publisher, Premium Edition 2016.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. www.indiabix.com
2. http://www.practiceaptitudetests.com

39
V SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
 CE650208 – STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I
L T P C
Course Type: Theory with
Course Category: Program Core
Practical Component 2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the computation of slopes and deflections using energy methods.
• To know the analysis of beams and frames by strain energy method.
• To study the indeterminate structures by slope deflection method.
• To study the indeterminate beams and frames for internal forces using moment distribution
method.
• To study the indeterminate structures by theorem of three moments.

UNIT 1 - FUNDAMENTAL OF STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 6

Determination of static indeterminacy and kinematic indeterminacy – Deficiency for beams, frames
and pin joined trusses – Behaviour of structures – Principle of superposition – Analysis of pin-jointed
space trusses by method of Tension coefficient.

UNIT 2 - STRAIN ENERGY METHOD 6

Static indeterminacy - Strain energy method - analysis of indeterminate structures, beams, pin jointed
and rigid jointed structures - temperature effect - bending moment and shear force diagram.
UNIT 3 - SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD 6
Kinematic indeterminacy- Slope deflection method - analysis of continuous beams and portals -
bending moment and shear force diagram.
UNIT 4 - MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 6
Moment distribution method - analysis of continuous beams and portals - bending moment and shear
force diagram..
UNIT 5 - THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS 6
Static indeterminacy - Theorem of three moments- analysis of propped cantilevers- fixed & continuous
beam - bending moment and shear force diagram.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Not included for End Semester Examinations)
1. Analysis and Design of Plane Beam
2. Analysis and Design of Cantilever Beam
3. Analysis and Design of Plane Frame
4. Analysis and Design of Two Storied Residential Building

40
 5. Analysis and Design of Truss

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS (30+15)

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply the fundamental concepts of static indeterminacy and kinematic indeterminacy of
Structure
CO2: Analyze the beams, pin jointed and rigid jointed structures using Strain energy method
CO3: Analyze a structure using slope deflection method
CO4: Analyze a structure using moment distribution method
CO5: Analyze the beams by making use of theorem of three moments

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 - 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 2
CO2 3 2 - 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 2 1
CO3 3 2 - 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 2
CO4 3 2 - 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 2 1
CO5 3 2 - 2 3 - - 1 - - - - 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Reddy. C.S., "Basic Structural Analysis", Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2013.
2. Punmia.B.C, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, "Theory of structures", Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
3. Vazirani&Ratwani (2003), Analysis of Structures, Vol. 1 &II ,Khanna publishers
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S.Ramamrutham (2004), Theory of structures, Dhanpat Rai publications.
2. L.S.Negi (2003), Structural Analysis, Tata Mc-GrawHill.
3. Rajasekharan & Sankara Subramanian (2000), Computational Structural Mechanics, Prentice-
Hall of India.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/105/105105166/
2. https://www.newtondesk.com/structural-analysis-handwritten-study-notes/

41
 CE650209 – DESIGN OF RC ELEMENTS
Use IS Code -875 Part I-III, IS 456 : 2000, SP16:1980 code book
L T P C
Course Type: Theory
Course Category: Program Core
with Project 2 1 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the various methods for the design of concrete structures.
• To understanding of the design principles and methods for reinforced concrete (RC) beams,
considering flexure, bond, anchorage, shear, torsion, and serviceability requirements.
• To gain foundational knowledge of slab structures and their types.
• To gain familiarity with different types of columns.
• To acquire the knowledge and skills necessary to effectively design various types of
footings
UNIT 1: METHODS OF DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 9
Concept of Elastic method, ultimate load method and limit state method – Advantages of Limit
State Method over other methods- Design codes and specification- Introduction to working stress
method, ultimate load design (Principles only) - Limit State philosophy as detailed in IS code –
Design of rectangular beam and slabs by working stress method.
UNIT 2: DESIGN OF BEAM, SHEAR & TORSION 9
Design of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular and flanged beams- Use of design aids for
Flexure - Behaviour of RC members in bond and Anchorage - Design requirements as per current
code - Behaviour of RC beams in shear and torsion - Design of RC members for combined bending,
shear and torsion - serviceability.
UNIT 3: DESIGN OF SLABS AND STAIRCASE 9
Introductions about slab - Partial Safety Factors –Design of one way, two way and continuous
rectangular slabs subjected to uniformly distributed load for various boundary conditions – Types
of Staircases – Design of dog-legged Staircase –Introduction to Flat Slab.
UNIT 4: DESIGN OF COLUMNS 9
Column – Types – Concept of effective length and eccentricity of a column - Design of short
rectangular and circular columns for axial, uniaxial and biaxial bending. Design of slender column.
UNIT 5: DESIGN OF FOOTING 9
Footing – Types - Design of axially and eccentrically loaded Isolated, square and rectangular
footings – Design of combined rectangular and Trapezoidal footing for two columns only. Design

42
of wall footing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the various design methodologies for the design of RC elements
CO2: Analyze and design rectangular and flanged RC beams
CO3: Design and analyze reinforced concrete slabs and staircases.
CO4: Design columns of different types and sizes for diverse structural applications
CO5: Designing safe, efficient, and economical footings for a wide range of structural
applications.
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 3 3 2
CO2 2 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 3 1 2 - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 3 - - - - - - 3 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishna Raju, N., “Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, CBS Publishers
&Distributors, New Delhi, 2017
2. Sinha, S.N. “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi 2014.
3. Subramanian N,” Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, Oxford University Press,
2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Varghese, P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi 2010.
2. Unnikrishna Pillai, S., Devdas Menon, “Reinforced Concrete Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi4th Edition 2021.
3. Punmia B. C, Ashok. Kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain “Limit State Design of Reinforced
Concrete”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi 2007.
4. IS 456 : 2000 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice 4th revision 2007
5. SP 16 : 1980 - Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/105/105105105/
2. https://www.newtondesk.com/reinforced-cement-concrete-rcc-psc-handwritten-study-
notes/

43
 CE650210 – ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the principles of water supply system and planning the sources, conveyance of water.
• To realize the different water treatment techniques.
• To study the Planning, designing and execution of drainage system.
• To recognize the different primary and secondary treatment techniques of wastewater.
• To learn the principles of sludge management and disposal of wastewater.
UNIT 1: PLANNING FOR WATERSUPPLY SYSTEM 9
Public water supply system - Planning - Objectives - Design period - Population forecasting -Water
demand - Sources of water and their characteristics - Surface and Groundwater - Impounding reservoir
well hydraulics - Development and selection of source - Water quality - Characterization -Water
quality standards and parameters.
UNIT 2: WATER TREATMENT 9
Objectives - Unit operations and processes - Principles, functions design and drawing of flash mixers,
flocculators, sedimentation tanks and sand filters – Filter press – Disinfection - Ozonation and UV -
Residue Management – TSDF – Co-processing and co-incineration.
UNIT 3: PLANNING AND DESIGN OF SEWERAGE SYSTEM 9
Sources, Characteristics of sewage and its composition - population equivalent - Estimating quantity
of sewage - Storm runoff estimation - Sewerage - separate, combined and partially seperate system -
Hydraulic design of flow in sanitary sewers - sewer materials -Laying and testing - sewer
appurtenances – sewage pumping - Discharge standards for Effluents.
UNIT 4: SEWAGE TREATMENT 9
Objectives – Unit Operations and Processes - Collection system - Selection of treatment processes -
Primary treatment – Principles, functions and design of sewage treatment units - screens - grit chamber
- primary sedimentation tanks - Onsite sanitation - Septic tank - Activated Sludge Process - Natural
systems - Ponds and Lagoons - Trickling filters - Rotating biological contactors - Hybrid system -
SBR - MBR - MBBR - FBR (Basics)- Anaerobic systems - Anaerobic filters .
UNIT 5: SEWAGE DISPOSAL ANDSLUDGEMANAGEMENT 9
Dilution – Self-purification of surface water bodies - Oxygen sag curve – Streeter Phelps equation -

44
Eutrophication - Land Disposal – Sewage farming – Sewage sickness - Sludge Digestion-
characterization - Thickening – Dewatering – Drying - Disposal - Septage Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Examine the various sources of water and their characteristics
CO2: Design the components of a water treatment plant
CO3: Interpret the composition of sewage, estimate the wastewater generation and design of
sewer system
CO4: Attribute the type of treatment system and Select the suitable sewage treatment process
CO5: Describe the concepts of self-purification of streams and sludge disposal methods
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - 2 2 - 3 - - 1 - 1 2 2 2
CO2 2 1 - 2 2 1 1 - - 1 - 3 2 1
CO3 1 - - 2 2 - 1 3 - 2 - 2 2 -
CO4 2 2 - 1 3 1 1 - - - - 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Garg, S.K., ―Environmental Engineering‖, Vol.1& II Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Punmia, B.C., Ashok K Jain and Arun K Jain, ―Water Supply Engineering‖,
LaxmiPublications Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Syed R. Qasim ―Wastewater Treatment Plants‖, CRC Press, WashingtonD.C.,2010

2. Gray N.F, ―Water Technology‖, Elsevier India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
3. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,
Government of India, New Delhi, 2013
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/127/105/127105018/
2. https://easyengineering.net/ce6503-environmental-engineering-ee-1-5-html/

45
 CE650801 – CONTRACT LAWS FOR CIVIL ENGINEERS
L T P C
Course Category: Program
Course Type: Theory
Mandatory 2 0 0 0
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the contract and arbitration laws.
• To know the fundamental constitutional rights and laws related to RTI.
• To study the human rights and labour laws.
• To learn the legal requirements and statutory regulations.
• To learn the copyright and patent laws related to products developed.
UNIT 1: CONTRACT AND ARBITRATION LAWS 9
Indian contracts act - Elements - Types and features of contracts - Suitability - Design of contract
documents - International and standard contract documents - Law of torts - Transparency in tenders
act. Arbitration - Comparison of acts and laws – Agreements
UNIT 2: FUNDAMENTAL CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS AND LAWS
9
RELATED TO RTI
Constitutional Law - Fundamental Rights - Directive principles of State policy - Fundamental
Duties - Emergency provisions - kinds, legal requirements and legal effects - Right to Information
Act - Official Secret Act - Indian Evidence Act - Information Technology Act - Water Act.
UNIT 3: HUMAN RIGHTS AND LABOUR LAWS 9
Introduction - Human Rights in Indian tradition and Western tradition - Civil & Political Rights -
Economic, Social and Cultural Rights Laws for social security - Insurance and safety regulations -
Workmen’s compensation Act -Indian factory Act – Tamilnadu factory Act - Child labour Act
UNIT 4: LEGAL REQUIREMENTS 9
Insurance and bonding - Laws governing sale, purchase and use of urban and rural land - Land
revenue codes - Tax laws - Income tax, Sales tax, Excise and Custom duties and their influence on
construction costs - Legal requirements for planning
UNIT 5: COPYRIGHT AND PATENT LAWS 9
Law relating to Intellectual property - Main forms of IP, Copyright, Trademarks, Patents and
Designs - Secrets - International instruments on IP - International organizations relating to IPR -
Law relating to Trademarks under Trademark Act - Law relating to Patents under Patents Act -
Process of obtaining patent

46
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Exercise the contract and arbitration laws during conflicts in projects
CO2: Practice the fundamental constitutional rights and laws related to RTI
CO3: Adopt human rights and labour laws for smooth project operations
CO4: Apply tax and property laws during purchasing and selling of properties
CO5: Register copyright and patent laws for the products developed
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 1 - 2 3 - 2
CO2 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 1 - 2 3 - 2
CO3 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 1 - 2 3 - 2
CO4 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 1 - 2 3 - 2
CO5 1 1 - - - 2 1 3 1 - 2 3 - 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nikita Agarwal, Rishi Kumar, “Laws for Engineers”, Genius Publications, 2016.
2. Abrahamson M.V, “Engineering Law and the I.C.E Contracts, 4th Edition, 2016.
3. Joseph T. Bockrath, “Contracts and the Legal Environment for Engineers and Architects”, Seventh
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gajaria G.T., “Laws Relating to Building and Engineering Contracts in India”, Lexis Nexis; Fourth
edition, 2000.
2. Jimmie Hinze, “Construction Contracts”, McGraw-Hill Education; 3rd edition, 2013.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://dish.tn.gov.in/assets/pdf/FactoriesAct1948andTamilNaduFactoriesRules.pdf
2. http://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1988/48/contents

47
 CE650305 – SURVEY FIELD PRACTICES LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the principles and techniques of conducting traverses using a total station.
• To make the students involve in field surveying works
• To gain a fundamental understanding of geoinformatics, including its principles, applications,
and technologies.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Traverse - using Total station
2. Contouring
a. Radial tachometric contouring - Radial Line at Every 45 Degree and Length not less than 60
Meter on each Radial Line
b. Block Level/ By squares of size at least 100 Meter x 100 Meter at least 20 Meter interval
c. L.S & C.S - Road and canal alignment for a Length of not less than 1 Kilo Meter at least L.S
at Every 30M and C.S at every 90 M
3. Offset of Buildings and Plotting the Location
4. Use of GPS to determine latitude and longitude and locate the survey camp location
5. Traversing using GPS
6. Curve setting by deflection angle
7. Introduction to geo informatics (Study)
8. Drone demonstration (Demonstration)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
List of Requirements
(Requirements for a batch of 30 students)
Sl. No. Description of Equipment’s Quantity
1. Theodolites At least 6 forevery30 students
2. Dumpy level At least 6 forevery30 students
3. Pocket stereoscope At least 6 forevery30 students
4. Ranging rods 5 no’s
5. Arrows 10 no’s
6. Leveling staff
7. Cross staff 1for a set of 5students

48
 8. Tapes(20m&30m)
9. Total Station with Prism and Stand At least 6 forevery30 students
10. GPS (Hand Held) At least 6 forevery30 students
11. Drones 01 no
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply traverse techniques using total station
CO2: Perform Contouring using various methods
CO3: Accurately offset buildings and plot locations & GPS surveying
CO4: Understand Fundamentals of Geoinformatics:
CO5: Demonstrate Drone Technology for Surveying
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Punmia B.C, “Surveying, Vol. I and II”, Laxmi Publications, 2016.

2. Basak N.N, “Surveying and Levelling”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2014.
3. Kumar S., “ Basics of Remote Sensing and GIS”, Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd,2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Arora K. R, “Surveying Vol. I and II”, Standard Book House, 2015..

2. Duggal S.K, “Surveying Vol. I and II”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
3. Kanetkar T.P, “Surveying and Levelling Vols. I and II”, United Book Corporation, Pune,2014
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://sliitr.vlabs.ac.in/
2. https://sl-iitr.vlabs.ac.in/List%20of%20experiments.html

49
 CE650306 – CONCRETE AND HIGHWAY ENGINEERING LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

• To characterize the physical properties of coarse aggregate

• To evaluate the workability of concrete through different methods
• To assess the compressive strength of hardened concrete using both destructive and non-
destructive testing methods
• To assess the split tensile strength of hardened concrete
• To characterize the physical and mechanical properties of bitumen.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Finding the fineness modulus of the coarse aggregate.
2. Finding the water absorption on the coarse aggregate.
3. Finding the impact value of coarse aggregate.
4. Finding the Specific Gravity of coarse Aggregate.
5. Finding the flakiness index of Aggregate.
6. Finding the elongation index of Aggregate.
7. Determination of workability of concrete using slump cone apparatus.
8. Determine of workability of concrete using compaction factor apparatus.
9. Determination of workability of concrete using Vee Bee consistometer apparatus
10. Finding the Compressive Strength of harden concrete (distractive and Non-distractive).
11. Find the split tensile strength of hardened concrete.
12. Determination of softening point of the asphalt/bitumen sample.
13. Determination of penetration test on bitumen.
14. Determination of bitumen viscosity.
15. Determination of binder content of bitumen.
16. To find the specific gravity of bitumen.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
List of Requirements
(Requirements for a batch of 30 students)
Sl. No. Description of Equipment Quantity required (No’s)
1. CTM – 100 Tone Capacity 01
2. Vee Bee Consistometer 01

50
 3. Aggregate Impact Testing Machine 01
4. Concrete Cube Mould 06
5. Concrete Cylinder Mould 03
6. Concrete Prism Mould 02
7. Concrete Beam Mould 03
8. Mortar Cube Mold 03
9. Sieves[80,40,16,12.5,10,4.75 mm & Pane] 1 Set
10. Concrete Mixer 01
11. Slump Cone 03
12. Flow Table 01
13. Trowels 03
14. Blains Apparatus 02
15. Flakiness Gauge 02
16. Elongation Gauge 02
17. Le Chatelier Apparatus 03 Set
18. Steel Scale [ 1 m ] 01
19. Mixing Tray 02
20. Density Basket 01
21. Aggregate Crushing Apparatus 01
22. Vernier Caliper 02
23. Screw Gauge 02
24. Penetration Test Apparatus 01
25. Ring Ball Apparatus 01
26. Bitumen Viscometer 01
27. Hot Air oven 01
28. Centrifuge Bitumen Extractor 01
29. Vicat’s Apparatus 01
30. Pycnometer 03
31. Compaction Factor Test Apparatus 01
32. Rebound Hammer Test 01
33. Specific gravity bottles. 01
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Diagnose the properties of aggregates with different testing methods.
CO2: Prepare different concrete mixes and check the workability properties.
CO3: Determine the strength of harden concrete.
CO4: Evaluate the Consistency and Properties of Bitumen
CO5: Determine the Bitumen Content in the Bituminous Mixes
CO-PO MAPPING

51
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1
CO2 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1
CO3 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1
CO4 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1
CO5 3 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shetty,M.S, "Concrete Technology (Theory and Practice)” , S.Chand and Company Ltd, New
Delhi 28th Revised Edition 2021.
2. Santhakumar,A.R; "Concrete Technology" , Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018
3. Kadiyali L R, Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, Khanna Technical Publications, Delhi,
2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. IS10262-1982 Recommended Guidelines for Concrete Mix Design, Bureau of Indian
Standards, New Delhi, 2018.
2. IRC Standards (IRC 37 - 2001 & IRC 58 -1998).
3. Gambir, M.L; "Concrete Technology",3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd,
New Delhi, 2014.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104030
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oD0qIR6PnlQ

52
 CE650503 – INTEGRATED APTITUDE SKILLS - I (HIGHER)
L T P C
Course Type: Practical
Course Category: EEC
(Skill Based Course) 0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the basic concepts of quantitative ability
• To understand the basic concepts of logical reasoning Skills
• To acquire satisfactory competency in use of verbal reasoning

UNIT 1 - QUANTITATIVE APTITUDE 10

1. Numbers – Number Systems, Types of Numbers, Series (Arithmetic Progression, Geometric
Progression)
2. Problem on Ages
3. HCF & LCM
4. Profit & Loss
5. Problems on Trains, Boats & Stream
6. Calendar & Clocks
7. Time & Work
8. Speed & Distance (Or) Time & Distance
9. Decimal Fractions, Simplification (Including Expression & Evaluation)
10. Square Root, Cubic Root
11. Average
12. Surds & Indices
13. Odd Man Out & Series

UNIT 2 - LOGICAL REASONING 10

General Mental Ability
1. Series completion
2. Analogy
3. Classification
4. Coding-Decoding
5. Blood Relation
6. Puzzle test
7. Sequential Output Tracing
8. Direction sense test

53
 9. Logical Venn Diagram
10. Alphabet Test
11. Alpha-numeric sequence Puzzle
12. Number, Ranking and Time sequence Test
13. Mathematical Operations
14. Logical Sequence of words
15. Arithmetical Reasoning
16. Inserting the mission character
17. Data Sufficiency
18. Eligibility test
19. Assertions and Reasoning
20. Situation Reaction Test
21. Verification of truth of the statement
UNIT 3 - VERBAL ABILITY 10
1. Vocabulary Based – Synonyms
2. Vocabulary Based - Antonyms
3. Spotting Errors
4. Spelling
5. Jumbled words
6. One word substitution
7. Sentence Correction
8. Idioms & Phrases.
9. Commonly confusing words
10. Statement and Conclusion
11. Change of Voice
12. Facts/Inferences and Judgment.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Develop strong foundational skills in mathematics, enabling them to confidently solve a
variety of numerical and logical problems encountered in real-world scenarios.
CO2: Develop strong logical reasoning and analytical skills, enabling them to solve a wide range
of problems encountered in competitive exams, aptitude tests, and real-life situations.
CO3: Develop a comprehensive understanding of English language usage, grammar, and
vocabulary, enabling them to communicate effectively in both written and spoken contexts,
as well as to analyze and evaluate written material critically as well as analyze and evaluate
written material critically

CO-PO MAPPING

54
 CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Agarwal R.S, “Quantitative Aptitude,” S.Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, First
Edition 1989, Reprint, 2016.
2. Agarwal R.S, “A Modern Approach to Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning,” S.Chand and
Company Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, First Edition 1994, Reprint, 2016.
3. Agarwal R.S, “Objective General English,” S.Chand and Company Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, First
Edition 1997, Reprint, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Anand P A, “Quantitative Aptitude,” Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Edition,2016
2. Arun Sharma, “How to Prepare for Logical Reasoning,” Tata-McGraw Hill Education Series.
New Delhi, First Edition 2016.
3. Sharon Weiner Green, Ira K Wolf, “Barron’s GRE,” Barron Publishers. First Edition 1995,
Reprint, 2016.
4. The Princeton Review, “Cracking the GRE”, Random House Publisher, Premium Edition 2016.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. www.indiabix.com.
2. http://www.practiceaptitudetests.com/

55
VI SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
 CE660211 - STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II
L T P C
Course Type: Theory with
Course Category: Program Core
Practical Component 2 0 2 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the matrix force methods for analyzing the indeterminate structures.
• To learn the stiffness matrix method to analyse indeterminate structures.
• To know the analysis of space truss and arch structures.
• To know the analysis of cable supported structures.
• To study the concept of plastic analysis for beams and rigid frames.

UNIT 1 - MATRIX FLEXIBILITY METHOD 6

Equilibrium and compatibility - Determinate and Indeterminate structures - Indeterminacy - Primary
structure - Compatibility conditions - Element to structure transformation - Analysis of indeterminate
pin - Jointed plane frames, continuous beams, rigid jointed plane frames (with redundancy restricted
to three).

UNIT 2 - MATRIX STIFFNESS METHOD 6

Element and global stiffness matrices - Analysis of continuous beams - Co-ordinate transformations -
Rotation matrix - Transformations of stiffness matrices, load vectors and displacements vectors -
Analysis of pin-jointed plane frames and rigid frames (with redundancy limited to three).
UNIT 3 - SPACE TRUSSES AND ARCHES 6
Space trusses - Method of tension coefficients - Arches - Types of arches - Analysis of three hinged,
two hinged and fixed arches - Parabolic and circular arches - Settlement and temperature effects.
UNIT 4 - CABLES AND SUSPENSION BRIDGES 6
Equilibrium of cable - Length of cable - Anchorage of suspension cables - Stiffening girders - Cables
with three hinged stiffening girders - Influence lines for three hinged stiffening girders.
UNIT 5 - PLASTIC ANALYSIS 6
Plastic theory - Statically indeterminate structures - Plastic moment of resistance - Plastic modulus -
Shape factor - Load factor - Plastic hinge and mechanism - Length of plastic hinge - Collapse load -
Static and kinematic methods - Upper and lower bound theorems.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(Not included for End Semester Examination)
1. Analysis and Design of Multi-Storied Building
2. Analysis and Design of Circular Water Tank

56
 3. Analysis and Design of a Continuous Beam
4. Analysis and Design of 2D Frame
5. Analysis and Design of 3D Frame
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS (30+15)

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Employ matrix flexibility method for analysis of continuous beams, pin jointed trusses and
rigid plane frames.
CO2: Apply matrix stiffness approach for analysis of continuous beams, pin jointed trusses and
rigid plane frames.
CO3: Analyze space truss and arches.
CO4: Analyze the suspension bridges with stiffening girders.
CO5: Apply the plastic analysis method to compute collapse load in beams and rigid frames.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - 1 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Punmia B.C., Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, “Theory of Structures”, Laxmi
Publications, 2017.
2. Vaidyanathan R. and Perumal P., “Comprehensive structural Analysis – Vol. I & II”, Laxmi
Publications, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Ghali.A, Nebille,A.M. and Brown,T.G. “Structural Analysis” A unified classical and Matrix
approach” 6th edition. Spon Press, London and New York, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gambhir. M.L., "Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics and Analysis"., PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
2. BhavaiKatti, S.S, “Structural Analysis – Vol. 1 and Vol. 2”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2010.
3. William Weaver Jr. & James M. Gere, "Matrix Analysis of Framed Structures", CBS
Publishers and Distributors, Delhi, 2004.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/105/105105109/
2. https://easyengineering.net/ce8602-structural-analysis-ii-notes-nw/

57
 CE660212 - DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Use IS 800:2007 Code Book & Steel Table
L T P C
Course Type: Theory with
Course Category: Program Core
Project 2 1 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study the design of method of steel structures and connections.
• To study the different of design of tension members
• To know the different of design of compression members.
• To know the different flexural members.
• To study the various types of industrial shed elements.

UNIT 1 - DESIGN METHODS AND CONNECTIONS FOR STEEL MEMBERS 9

Properties of steel–Structural steel sections–Limit State Design Concepts – Loads on Structures–
Connections using rivets, welding, and bolting–Design of bolted and welded joints–Eccentric
Connections–Efficiency of joints.

UNIT 2 - STEEL TENSION MEMBERS 9

Tension Members - Types of Tension members and sections –Behaviour of Tension Members- modes
of failure-Slenderness ratio- Net area – Net effective sections for Plates ,Angles and Tee in tension –
Design of plate and angle tension members-design of built up tension Members- Use of lug angles.
UNIT 3 - STEEL COMPRESSION MEMBERS 9
Types of compression members and sections–Behaviour and types of failures-Short and slender
columns- Current code provisions for compression members - Effective Length, Slenderness ratio –
Axially Loaded solid section Columns - Design of Built up Laced and Battened type columns – Design
of column bases – Plate and Gusseted bases for Axially loaded columns- Splices for columns.
UNIT 4 - STEEL FLEXURE MEMBERS 9
Types of steel Beam sections - Behaviour of Beams in flexure– Classification of cross sections -
Flexural Strength and Lateral stability of Beams – Shear Strength-Web Buckling, Crippling and
defection of Beams - Design of laterally supported Beams - Design of solid rolled section Beams -
Design Strength of Laterally unsupported Beams.
UNIT 5 - DESIGN OF TRUSSES 9
Introduction-Evaluation of design dead load, live load, wind load, design of truss using rolled steel
sections – Purlins-Truss members-Supports.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

58
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Design the suitable connection for joints in steel structures.

CO2: Design steel tension members using plates and angle sections.
CO3: Design steel compression members like simple columns, built up columns and column
bases.
CO4: Design flexural members like beams and plate girders.
CO5: Evaluate the various loads acting and design the trusses and purlins.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gambhir. M.L., “Fundamentals of Structural Steel Design”, McGraw Hill Education India
Pvt.Ltd., 2013
2. Shiyekar. M.R., “Limit State Design in Structural Steel”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
Learning Pvt.Ltd., 2nd Edition, 2013.
3. Subramanian.N, “Design of Steel Structures”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Narayanan.R. “Teaching Resource on Structural Steel Design”, INSDAG, Ministry of Steel

Publications, 2002.
2. Duggal. S.K, “Limit State Design of Steel Structures”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, 2005.
3. Bhavikatti.S.S, “Design of Steel Structures” By Limit State Method as per IS:800–2007, IK
International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2009.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105/105/105105162/
2. https://www.newtondesk.com/design-of-steel-structure-handwritten-study-notes/

59
 CE660213 - CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the scope of construction Management
• To knowledge about the necessity of planning in the diverse construction projects
• To study the various contract system and tender documents
• To know the approval and sanction of estimates and measurements of works
• To study the management information system.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Construction Management - Importance – Scope of construction Management – Principles –
Management Functions – Construction stages - Constructor Sequence- Types of firms – Government
– Private – Public sector – Owner-Builder Operation - Planning for materials – Machines –
Organization of Project Participants Traditional Designer- Turnkey Operation -Leadership and
Motivation for the Project Team

UNIT 2 - PLANNING AND SCHEDULING 9

Construction Planning: Need – Collection of field data – Scheduling- Defining Activities- WBS
creation, Project planning: Precedence Relation -Forms of scheduling – Bar charts – Milestone charts
– Network analysis – CPM and PERT – Numbering events – Time calculations – Floats – Critical
path – Time estimates – Time cost optimization – Resource levelling
UNIT 3 - EXECUTION OF WORKS 9
Execution of work – Departmental execution – Contract system – Calling of tenders – Tender
documents – Types of contracts – Contracting firms – Specifications, quality control – Legal
implications – Penalties – Arbitration
UNIT 4 - STORES AND ACCOUNTS 9
Measurements of works – Recording – Checking – Types of bills – Modes of payment – Cash Book
–Imprest account – Temporary advance – Revised estimate – Approval and sanction of estimates –
Budget -Completion report – Classification of stores – Maintenance – Inspection – Transfers – Surplus
and shortage
UNIT 5 - INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT 9
Relationship between management and labour – Industrial psychology – Motivating – Merit rating –
Incentive plans – Leadership – Importance – Styles – Communication – Types – Methods – Process

60
– Time and motion studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the fundamental techniques in construction management.
CO2: Outline the system of scheduling by using software.
CO3: Build the system of labour management and safety measures.
CO4: Explain the engineering economics system and network analysis.
CO5: Classify the basic value of project management.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO2 1 - 2 1 3 - 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 - - 3 3 1 - 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 - 1 1 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 3 1
CO5 1 2 2 3 2 - - 2 3 - 3 1 2 1

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sengupta (2002), Construction Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
2. Construction Management and accounts (2002) by J.L. Sharma, Satya Publications.
3. Subramaniam (2001), Construction Management, Anuradha Agencies.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Joseph.L (2000), Essential of Management, Prentice Hall of India.

2. Mote Paul and Gupta (2001), Management Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
3. Manie (2005), Essentials of Management, Prentice Hall of India.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/104/105104161/
2. https://www.gpjajpur.org/public/uploads/lres-485.pdf

61
 IM660403 - PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
Course Category: Institute L T P C
Course Type: Theory
Mandatory 2 0 0 0
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Students will understand the importance of Values and Ethics in their Personal lives and
professional careers
• The students will learn the rights and responsibilities
• Responsibilities of employee, team member and a global citizen.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION TO PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 6

Basic Concepts, Governing Ethics, Personal & Professional Ethics, Ethical Dilemmas, Life Skills,
Emotional Intelligence, Thoughts of Ethics, Value Education, Dimensions of Ethics.

UNIT 2 - BASIC THEORIES 6

Basic Ethical Principles, Moral Developments, Deontology, Utilitarianism, Virtue Theory, Rights
Theory, Casuist Theory, Moral Absolution, Moral Rationalism, Moral Pluralism, Ethical Egoism,
Feminist Consequentialism, Moral Issues, Moral Dilemmas, Moral Autonomy.
UNIT 3 - PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IN ENGINEERING 6
Professions and Norms of Professional Conduct, Norms of Professional Conduct vs. Profession;
Responsibilities, Obligations and Moral Values in Professional Ethics, Professional codes of ethics,
The limits of predictability and responsibilities of the engineering profession, Central Responsibilities
of Engineers.
UNIT 4 - WORK PLACE RIGHTS & RESPONSIBILITIES 6
Ethics in changing domains of Research, Engineers and Managers; Organizational Complaint
Procedure, difference of Professional Judgment with in the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC),
the Hanford Nuclear Reservation. Ethics in changing domains of research.
UNIT 5 - GLOBAL ISSUES IN PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 6
Introduction–Current Scenario, Technology Globalization of MNCs, International Trade, World
Summits, Issues, Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, Sustainable Development Ecosystem,
Energy Concerns, Ozone Deflection, Pollution, Ethics in Manufacturing and Marketing, Media Ethics;
War Ethics; Bio Ethics, Intellectual Property Rights.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

62
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understanding basic purpose of profession, professional ethics and various moral and social
issues.
CO2: Awareness of professional rights and responsibilities of a engineer, safety and risk benefit
analysis of a engineer.
CO3: Acquiring knowledge of various roles of Engineer In applying ethical principles at various
professional levels.
CO4: Professional Ethical values and contemporary issues.
CO5: Excelling in competitive and challenging environment to contribute to industrial growth.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO2 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO4 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO5 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Professional Ethics: Subramanian R, Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Ethics in Engineering Practice & Research, Caroline Whit beck, 2e, Cambridge University
Press 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Ethics, Concepts Cases: Charles E Harris Jr., Michaels Pritchard, Michael lJ
Rabin’s, 4e, Cengage learning, 2015.
2. Business Ethics concepts & Cases: Manuel G Velasquez, 6e, PHI, 2008.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://online courses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mg54/preview

63
 CE660307 – ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

• To study the principles of sampling and preservation of water and wastewater.

• To know the principles of testing of water and wastewater.
• To learn the testing of bleaching powder and chlorinated water.
• To learn the analyzing methods for water and wastewater.
• To study the detection of gases by using analyzers.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Sampling and preservation methods and significance of characterization of water and

wastewater.
2. Determination of i) pH and turbidity ii)Hardness
3. Determination of residual chlorine
4. Determination of Chlorides
5. Determination of Ammonia Nitrogen
6. Determination of Sulphate in water sample
7. Determination of Optimum Coagulant Dosage
8. Determination of chlorination of water
9. Determination of Dissolved oxygen in drinking water
10. Determination of Total solids, suspended solids, Dissolved solids, organic solids, inorganic
solids in water and wastewater samples
11. Determination of BOD
12. Determination of COD
13. Introduction to Bacteriological Analysis (Demonstration only)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
List of Requirements
(Requirements for a batch of 30 students)
Sl. No. Description of Equipment Quantity required (No’s)
1. Ph meter 01
2. Turbidity meter 01
3. Electric Conductivity meter 01
4. Refrigerator 01

64
 5. BOD incubator 01
6. Muffle furnace 01
7. Hot air oven 01
8. Magnetic stirrer with hot plates 05
9. Desiccator 03
10. Jar test apparatus 01
11. Water bath 01
12. Glass waves / Crucibles 05
13. COD apparatus 01
14. Kjeldane apparatus 01
15. Heating mantles 03
16. Calorimeter 01
17. Chlorine comparator 01
18. Beaker 10
19. Standard flask 10
20. Burette with stand 10
21. Pipette 10
22. Filtration assembly 02
23. Chemicals Lot
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Find pH and turbidity of water
CO2: Explain the water quality parameters
CO3: Estimate the BOD and COD of water sample
CO4: Inspect the chemical characteristics of Water and Wastewater
CO5: Test for Sodium in water samples using Flame photometer
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 1 2 - 1 3 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

IS CODES:
1. IS 3025: Part 58:2006 Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water and
wastewater: Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD).
2. IS 3025: Part 21: 2009 Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water and
wastewater: Hardness.
3. IS 3025: Part 32: 1988 Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water and
wastewater: Chloride.

65
 4. IS 3025 : Part 16 : 1984 Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water and
wastewater : Filterable Residue (Total Dissolved Solids)
5. IS 3025: Part 11: 1983 Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water and
wastewater: pH Value.
6. IS3025:Part44:1993Methodsofsamplingandtest(PhysicalandChemical)forwaterandwastewater:
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. American Public Health Association (APHA) 2005, Standard methods for the examination of
water & wastewater. 21st edition, Eaton, A.D., Clesceri, L.S., Rice, E.W., Greenberg, A.E.,
Franson, M.A.H. APHA,Washington.
2. Garg, S.K., “Environmental Engineering Vol. I & II”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering Vol. I & II”, Standard Book House,Delhi-6
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103107084
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q45S46dCrZw&list=PLt0YnX1QnknjkdcLO1bX1gga6xZvrNeib

66
 CE660308 – ENVIRONMENTAL AND IRRIGATION DRAWING LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

• To learn the canal storage head works.

• To study the canal diversion head works.
• To learn the cross drainage works.
• To study the water treatment system design.
• To learn the various waste water treatment system.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Design and drawing of Aeration tank ,screen chamber and Grit channel
2. Design and drawing of Clariflocculator
3. Design and drawing of Clarifier
4. Design and drawing of Rapid sand filters
5. Design and drawing of Service reservoirs, Pumping station
6. Design and drawing of Activated sludge process
7. Design and drawing of Sludge digester, Sludge drying beds
8. Design and drawing of Septic tanks and disposal arrangements
9. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Gravity dam
10. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Tank Surplus weir
11. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Tank sluice with tower head
12. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Aqueducts and Syphon Aqueducts
13. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Super passage and Canal siphon
14. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Canal Drops and Canal escape
15. Drawing showing plan, elevation and foundation details of Proportional Distributors
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understanding water treatment processes and design principles and factors influencing their
efficiency.
CO2: Design the advanced treatment techniques for considerations for optimizing sedimentation
and clarification.

67
CO3: Designing filtration and distribution systems.
CO4: Designing biological treatment and sludge management.
CO5: Understanding & design the infrastructure design for water control.
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 3 - - 1 2 - 2 1 - 3 2 1
CO2 3 1 3 - - 1 2 - 2 1 - 3 2 1
CO3 3 1 3 - - 1 2 - 2 1 - 3 2 1
CO4 3 1 3 - - 1 2 - 2 1 - 3 2 1
CO5 3 1 3 - - 1 2 - 2 1 - 3 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Modi, P.N., “Environmental Engineering I & II”, Standard Book House, Delhi – 6, 2014.
2. Sathyanarayana Murthy “Irrigation Design and Drawing” Published by Mrs L.Banumathi, Tuni
east Godavari District. A.P. 1998.
3. Sharma R.K. "Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures" S Chand Publishing, New Delhi
2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Peary, H.S., ROWE, D.R., Tchobanoglous, G., “Environmental Engineering”, McGraw- Hill
Book Co., New Delhi, 2017.

2. Metcalf & Eddy, “Wastewater Engineering (Treatment and Reuse)”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2003.

3. Garg S.K., “Irrigation Environmental Engineering and design Structures”, Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi, 17th Reprint

WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JIFkQ7cnwN8

68
 CE660504 – TRAINING IN CENTRE FOR EXCELLENCE
(HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS SYSTEM LAB )
L T P C
Course Category: Program Core Course Type: Practical
0 0 2 1
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

• To explain the meaning of fluid power

• To differentiate between electrical, pneumatic and fluid power systems.
• To learn different values used in hydraulic and pneumatics
• To learn the different metering methods Inlet & outlet flow control.
• To Explain the industrial applications of fluid power
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Study of construction and working Hydraulic pumps, motors and Pneumatic Compressors
2. Study of hydraulic and pneumatic valves
3. Study of solenoid valve, limits switches.
4. Study of Basic hydraulic circuit for the working of double acting cylinder and a hydraulic
motor.
5. Study of Basic pneumatic circuit for the working of single and double acting cylinder.
6. Study of Speed control circuits. Different Metering methods Inlet & outlet flow control
(meter-in & meter-out circuit).
7. Study of Circuits for the Use of different direction control valves and valve actuation in single
and double acting cylinder, and multi actuation circuit.
8. Study of Hydraulic Counter-balancing circuit.
9. Study of Circuit with cam operated pilot valves operating a pilot operated 4way direction
control.
10. Study of hydraulics and Pneumatics circuit, based on the industrial application
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
List of Requirements
(Requirements for a batch of 30 students)
Sl. Description of Equipment Quantity required
No. (No’s)
1. Hydraulic Pumps, Motors, and Pneumatic Compressors 01
2. Hydraulic and Pneumatic Valves 01
3. Solenoid Valve and Limit Switches 01
4. Hydraulic Circuit for Double Acting Cylinder and Hydraulic
Motor
01
5. Pneumatic Circuit for Single and Double Acting Cylinder 01
6. Speed Control Circuits and Metering 01

69
 7.
Circuits for Direction Control Valves and Valve Actuation 01
8.
Hydraulic Counter-balancing Circuit 05
9.
Circuit with Cam-Operated Pilot Valves 03
10.
Hydraulics and Pneumatics Circuit for Industrial
01
Applications
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the principles of operation and construction of hydraulic pumps, motors, and
pneumatic compressors, exploring their roles in fluid power systems.
CO2: Analyze the functionality and applications of hydraulic and pneumatic valves, including
their types, functions, and control mechanisms within fluid power circuits.
CO3: Investigate the operation of solenoid valves and limit switches, examining their roles in
controlling fluid flow and actuation within hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
CO4: Design and implement basic hydraulic circuits for controlling the movement of double-
acting cylinders and hydraulic motors, emphasizing the practical application of fluid power
principles.
CO5: Develop fundamental pneumatic circuits for controlling the operation of single and double-
acting cylinders, demonstrating proficiency in pneumatic system design and
implementation.
CO-PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 3 1 2 2 1 - 1 1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 1 2 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 - 1 2 2 1 3 1 - 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 1 2 - 1 3 - 1 3 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Fluid Power with Applications" by Anthony Esposito, 7th Edition, Pearson, 2016.
2. "Hydraulics and Pneumatics: A Technician's and Engineer's Guide" by Andrew Parr, 3rd
Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2011.
3. "Industrial Hydraulics Manual" by Eaton Hydraulics Training Services, 6th Edition, Eaton
Corporation, 2019.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. "Hydraulic Control Systems" by Noah D. Manring, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2013.
2. "Pneumatic Systems: Principles and Maintenance" by S. R. Majumdar, 2nd Edition, CRC
Press, 2018.
3. "Fluid Power Technology" by James R. Daines, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/106/112106300/
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105047/

70
VERTICALS 1
 CE606101 – PREFABRICATED STRUCTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• The basic principles of prefabrication
• The calculation of handling and erection stresses
• The dimensioning and detailing of joint
• The erection of structures
• The design principles of prefabricated units

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Modular co-ordination - Components - Prefabrication systems and structural schemes - Types of
foundation - Design considerations - Economy of prefabrication - Prefabrication of load - Carrying
members (wall panels, columns) - Disuniting of structures - Structural behaviour of precast structures

UNIT 2 - HANDLING AND ERECTION STRESSES 9

Handling and erection stresses - Application of pre stressing of roof members - Floor systems - Two
way load bearing slabs - Wall panels - Columns
UNIT 3 - DIMENSIONING AND DETAILING OF JOINTS 9
Dimensioning and detailing of joints for different structural connections - Construction joints and
expansion joints
UNIT 4 - ERECTION OF STRUCTURES 9
Production - Transportation and Erection - Organizing of production - Storing and erection equipments
- Shuttering and mould design - Dimensional tolerances, Partial and Total prefabricated buildings
UNIT 5 - SELECTION OF PRE FABRICATION UNITS 9
Prefabricated units for Industrial structures - Multi-storied buildings and Water tanks etc., -
Application of prestressed concrete in prefabrication - Design of cross section based on efficiency of
material used - Introduction to Progressive collapse - Codal provisions
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

71
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply the design considerations of prefabrication structures
CO2: Calculate the handling and erection stresses of prefabricated members
CO3: Formulate dimensioning and detailing of joints of structural connections
CO4: Execute the Erection of the prefabricated structure
CO5: Select the economical prefabrication units

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 2 1 1 - - - 1 1 1 2 - 1 1
CO2
3 3 2 1 - - - 1 1 1 2 - 1 1
CO3
3 3 3 3 - 1 - 1 1 1 2 - 1 1
CO4 -
3 3 2 2 - - 1 1 1 2 - 1 1
CO5 -
3 2 2 2 - - 1 1 1 2 - 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hubert Bachmann, Alfred Steinle, “Precast Concrete Structures”, Ernst and Sohn GMBH &
Co., K.G., 2018.
2. "Structural design manual", Precast concrete connection details, Society for the studies in the
use of precast concrete, Netherland BetorVerlag, 2009.
3. Levitt, M., “Precast concrete materials, Manufacture properties and usage", Applied Science
Publishers, London, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. 1. Kim S. Elliott, “Multi-Storey Precast Concrete Framed Structures” Wiley-Blackwell, 2014.
2. B.Lewicki, “Building with Large Prefabricates”, Elsevier Publishing Company,
Amsterdam / London / New York, 1966.
3. Laszlo Mokk, “Prefabricated Concrete for Industrial and Public Structures", C.R.Books, 1964.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://studentbank.in/idea/nptel-prefabricated-structures-notes-pdf
2. https://www.scribd.com/document/378058062/Prefabricated-Structures-Lecture- Notes-
Study-Material-and-Important-Questions-Answers

72
 CE606102 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
2 1 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop an advanced understanding of the behavior
• To have the knowledge on Design Concepts
• To analyze the ultimate strength of continuous beams
• To analyze and Design of Prestressed concrete tanks
• To develop the Design procedure for Prestressed Composite Beams

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION – THEORY AND BEHAVIOUR 9

Basic concepts – advantages – materials required – systems and methods of prestressing – analysis of
sections – stress concept – strength concept – load balancing concept – effect of loading on the tensile
stresses in tendons – effect of tendon profile on deflections – factors influencing deflections –
calculation of deflections – short term and long term deflections – losses of prestress – estimation of
crack width.

UNIT 2 - DESIGN CONCEPTS 9

Flexural strength – simplified procedures- codal provision – strain compatibility method – basic
concepts in selection of cross section for bending – stress distribution in end block - design of
anchorage zone reinforcement – limit state design criteria – partial prestressing – applications.
UNIT 3 - CONTINUOUS BEAMS 9
Analysis – incorporation of moment due to reactions- pressure line due to prestressing force – principle
of linear transformation – concordant tendon profile – partially continuous beams – analysis for
ultimate strength – moment redistribution.
UNIT 4 - CIRCULAR PRESTRESSING 9
Introduction – General features of prestressed concrete tanks –Analysis and Design of prestressed
concrete tanks – Design of cylindrical and non-cylindrical pipe.
UNIT 5 - PRESTRESSED COMPOSITE BEAMS 9
Composite prestressed concrete beams – Design procedure – Calculation of stresses at important
stages both for propped and unpropped constructions – Design of shear connectors – Shrinkage
stresses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

73
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the terminology related to pre-stressing
CO2: Analyze the sections using strength, stress load balancing concept and losses of
prestressing
CO3: Design the flexural member and stress distribution in the end block
CO4: Design a prestress concrete pipes and tanks
CO5: Design the composite prestressed concrete beams & Determine the stress and estimate the
deflection for propped and unpropped constructions
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
2 1 - 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2
3 3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 1
CO3
3 3 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 -
3 3 2 - 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1
CO5 -
3 3 2 - - 1 - - - - 2 2 -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishna Raju N., “Prestressed concrete”, Tata McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi,2012.
2. Pandit.G.S. and Gupta.S.P., "Prestressed Concrete", CBS Publishers and Distributers Pvt.
Ltd,2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Rajagopalan, N, “Prestressed Concrete”, Alpha Science,2002.

2. Dayaratnam.P., "Prestressed Concrete Structures", Oxford and IBH, 2013.
3. Lin T.Y. and Ned.H.Burns, "Design of prestressed Concrete Structures", Third Edition, Wiley
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106117
2. https://easyengineering.net/design-of-prestressed-concrete- structures-by-lin-nw/

74
 CE606103 – BUILDING PLANNING AND SERVICES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop the Planning permissions & amenities
• To have the knowledge an Electrical Systems And Installations
• To have the knowledge on Lighting Services & HVAC
• To have the knowledge on fire fighting protection and resistance
• To develop the Building safety and security systems

UNIT 1 – GENERAL PLANNING 9

classifications of buildings, Planning permissions, permitted activity, Area and height limitations,
Community open spaces and amenities - Green buildings- Intelligent buildings.

UNIT 2 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS 9

Basics of electricity – Single and three phase supply- Protective devices in electrical installation –
types of earthing , Planning electrical wiring for building- Electrical layout for residential buildings.
UNIT 3 - LIGHTING SERVICES & HVAC 9
Classification of Lighting, - Energy conservation in lighting- Minimum level of illumination required
for different types of buildings - Behavior of Heat Propagation, General methods of Thermal
Insulation- Basic principles of Ventilation-Systems of ventilation, Basic principles and essentials of
Air Conditioning.
UNIT 4 - FIREFIGHTING SERVICES 9
Classification of buildings based on occupancy- fire fighting protection and fire resistance rating
,planning considerations in building for Fire protection-fire detection and fire fighting installation in
buildings.
UNIT 5 - MISCELLANEOUS 9
Building safety and security systems - Elevators and Escalators their standards and uses - Acoustic
services - Necessity of integrated planning and designing of different services in buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

75
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the general planning and development control rules for different types
of buildings
CO2: Apply the relevant codes and manuals for the design of building services
CO3: Apply the principles of electrical and lighting services for different uses in buildings &
planning services for domestic and industrial needs
CO4: Plan and design the requirements for HVAC system, firefighting and other
necessary services for various types of buildings
CO5: Incorporate the integrated planning and designing of necessary building services for
better usage of building

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
1 1 - - - 2 2 3 1 1 - 1 1 2
CO2
1 1 - - - 2 2 2 2 1 - 1 1 2
CO3
2 2 3 1 - 2 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 2
CO4 -
2 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 2
CO5 -
1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. National Building Code of India -2005.
2. Energy Conservation Building Code – 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Development Control Rules by Chennai Metropolitan Development Agency -2006.

2. CPHEEO Manual on Sewerage and sewage treatment systems – 2013.
3. Manual for environmental clearance for large construction projects – by Ministry of
environment, forest and climate change.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107156
2. https://www.scribd.com/document/415412140/Building-Planning- Architecture-Civil-
Engineering-Second-Year-Notes-Books-eBook-PDF-Download

76
 CE606104 – TALL BUILDINGS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• The Development of High Rise Building Structures
• The Horizontal Bracing & Composite Floor Systems
• The high-rise building structures and their behaviour under load
• The structural analysis and design of buildings
• The Modern trends in railways

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION 9
Tall Building in the Urban Context -Tall Building and its Support Structure -Development of High
Rise Building Structures - General Planning Considerations. Dead Loads - Live Loads- Construction
Loads -Snow, Rain, and Ice Loads - Wind Loads-Seismic Loading, Water and Earth Pressure Loads -
Loads - Loads Due to Restrained Volume Changes of Material - Impact and Dynamic Loads - Blast
Loads -Combination of Loads

UNIT 2 - THE VERTICAL STRUCTURE PLANE 9

Dispersion of Vertical Forces- Dispersion of Lateral Forces - Optimum Ground Level Space - Shear
Wall Arrangement - Behaviour of Shear Walls under Lateral Loading. Floor Structure or Horizontal
Building Plane Floor Framing Systems-Horizontal Bracing- Composite Floor Systems-High - Rise
Building as related to assemblage Kits Skeleton Frame Systems – Load Bearing Wall Panel Systems
- Panel Frame Systems - Multistory Box Systems
UNIT 3 - COMMON HIGH-RISE BUILDING STRUCTURES AND THEIR
9
BEHAVIOUR UNDER LOAD
Bearing Wall Structure-Shear Core Structure - Rigid Frame Systems- The Wall - Beam Structure:
Interspatial and Staggered Truss Systems - Frame - Shear Wall Building Systems - Flat Slab Building
Structures - Shear Truss - Frame Interaction System with Rigid - Belt Trusses - Tubular Systems-
Composite Buildings - Comparison of High - Rise Structural Systems Other Design Approaches
Controlling Building Drift Efficient Building Forms - The Counteracting Force or Dynamic Response

UNIT 4 - APPROXIMATE STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF BUILDINGS 9

Approximate Analysis of Bearing Wall Buildings -Cross Wall Structure -Long Wall Structure The
Rigid Frame Structure Approximate Analysis for Vertical Loading - Approximate Analysis for Lateral
Loading - Approximate Design of Rigid Frame Buildings-Lateral Deformation of Rigid Frame

77
Buildings Rigid Frame - Shear Wall Structure - Vierendeel Structure - Hollow Tube Structure
UNIT 5 - ADVANCES IN RAILWAYS 9
Introduction to modern trends in Indian Railways in the design of high speed tracks - Modern trends
in railway track alignment - Railways for Urban area - LRT & MRTS - Mono Rail – Metro Rail -
Hyper loop- Recent developments in railway projects
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Design the tall building based on different load conditions
CO2: Analyse the shear wall and load bearing wall panel systems
CO3: Comparison of Composite Buildings and High Rise Structural Systems
CO4: Design and analysis of Composite Buildings and High Rise Structural Systems
CO5: Analyse of High Rise Suspension Systems and Pneumatic High Rise Buildings

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
2 1 1 - - - - - - 3 - 1 1 1
CO2
3 3 2 - 2 - - 3 - - - 1 1 1
CO3
2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO4 3
2 3 2 - 2 - 2 - - 1 1 1 1
CO5 1
2 2 1 - - - 1 - - - 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Taranath B.S., “Structural Analysis and Design of Tall Buildings”, McGraw Hill, 2016.
2. Smith B.S and Coull. A, “ Tall Building structures – Analysis and Design” John Rile and sons
, 2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. WOLFGANG SCHUELLER " High - rise building Structures", John Wiley and Sons
2. Bryan Stafford Smith and Alex Coull, " Tall Building Structures ", Analysis and Design, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1991
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/124105015
2. https://www.sefindia.org/forum/files/tall_building_books1_118.pdf

78
 CE606105 – CORROSION OF RC STRUCTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• The mechanism of corrosion and its effects.
• Various types of corrosion monitoring techniques and life cycle assessment.
• The corrosion control measures.
• Repair of corrosion affected structures.
• Recent trends in area of corrosion engineering.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION TO CORROSION 9

Basics of corrosion in concrete – Concrete as electrolyte - Physical, chemical, biological, mechanical
and structural factors - Effects of rebar corrosion - Initiation and propagation of corrosion - Corrosion
rate.

UNIT 2 - CORROSION MONITORING 9

Methods to assess the deterioration of concrete - Gravimetric Method - Electrochemical methods of
corrosion monitoring of rebar - Surface potential measurements, half-cell potential measurements,
electrical resistance probe technique, and instantaneous corrosion rate by linear polarization method -
Service life prediction.
UNIT 3 - CORROSION CONTROL METHODS 9
Corrosion control methods - Chemical and mineral admixtures - Coatings to Concrete surface -
Supplementary cementitious materials in concrete - Blended cements - Corrosion inhibitors.
UNIT 4 - REPAIR OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 9
Basic principles of repair - Concrete removal, surface preparation – Various grades of steel -
Preparation of the reinforcement - Quality assurance, the use of materials for concrete - Filling cracks
and cavities in concrete - Effects of cover thickness on cracking - Crack width measurements -
Carbonation depth, chloride profile tests, Slant shear tests - Repair materials - Properties, and selection
- Repair Techniques - Guniting , shotcrete techniques.
UNIT 5 - RECENT ADVANCEMENTS 9
Systematic investigation of failure analysis - Use of nanotechnology in corrosion studies - Introduction
to simulation of corrosion problems - Software applications - Technology transfer to real time
application.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

79
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the causes and effects of corrosion in RC structures
CO2: Converse various types of corrosion monitoring methods to RC structures
CO3: Select appropriate corrosion control methods to distressed concrete structures
CO4: Suggest suitable repair and rehabilitation techniques to corrosion affected concrete
structures
CO5: Apply state of art technology for corrosion related problems

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 1 3 1 1 - 1 1 - - - 1 1 1
CO2
3 1 3 - 1 - 1 1 - - - 1 1 1
CO3
2 2 3 - 1 - 1 - - - 1 1 1 1
CO4 1
2 1 2 1 - 1 1 - - - 1 1 1
CO5 1
2 1 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. P.C.Varghese,“Maintenance, repair and rehabilitation and minor works of buildings”, PHI
Pvt Ltd,2014.

2. Chatterjee U. K., “Environment degradation metals”, CRC press, Marcel Dekker Inc.,
2001.
3. Mohamed A. El-Reddy, “Steel-Reinforced Concrete Structures – Assessment and Repair
of Corrosion”, CRCPress, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kenneth.R.Trethewey and John Chamberlain,"Corrosion for Science and
Engineering",Longman Inc.,1996
2. Rajnarayan, “Metallic Corrosion and Prevention", Oxford Publications, 1988

3. John P. Broomfield, “Corrosion of steel in concrete-Understanding, investigation and

Repair", Taylor & Francis, 2007.
4. Zaki Ahmad, Digby Macdonald, “Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion
Control”, ButterworthHeinemann, 2013.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/106/105106202/
2. https://www.usb.ac.ir/FileStaff/5128_2020-2-8-17-56-58.pdf

80
 CE606106 – COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF STRUCTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Basic graphic primitives, transformations and 2-D drafting of computer graphics.
• Computer methods of structural analysis.
• Algorithm for finding load carrying capacity of steel columns
• Structural design concepts.
• Basics of Artificial Intelligence.

UNIT 1 - COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9

Graphic primitives - Transformations - Basics of 2-D drafting - Modeling of curves and surfaces –
Wire frame modeling - Solid modeling - Graphic standards - Drafting software packages and usage.

UNIT 2 - STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9

Banded and semi-banded matrices - element stiffness matrix – structure stiffness matrix –algorithm
for solving trusses by matrix stiffness method – simple applications.
UNIT 3 - STEEL STRUCTURES 9
Algorithm for finding load carrying capacity of steel columns – algorithm for moment carrying
capacity of steel beams – simple applications.
UNIT 4 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES 9
Algorithm for analysis of prestressed rectangular and I sections in flexure – algorithm for finding
losses in prestress – simple applications.
UNIT 5 - ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9
Introduction to artificial intelligence - Knowledge based expert systems – Rules and decision tables -
Inference mechanisms - simple applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Draft 2 D drawings using drafting software.
CO2: Formulate algorithm for solving equations by matrix method and construct algorithm for
Computer aided design of truss problems.
CO3: Construct algorithm for computer aided design of steel members.
CO4: Construct algorithm for analysis of prestressed concrete members.
CO5: Acquire the knowledge in Artificial Intelligence and Knowledge based expert Systems.

81
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 3 3 - 3 - 2 3 3 3 - - 2 2
CO2
3 3 3 - 3 - 2 3 3 3 - - 2 2
CO3
3 3 3 - 3 - 2 3 3 3 - - 2 2
CO4
3 3 3 - 3 - 2 3 3 3 - - 2 2
CO5
3 3 3 - 3 - 2 3 3 3 - - 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishnamoorthy C.S and Rajeev S., “Computer Aided Design”, Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi, 2005.
2. Rao. S.S., "Optimisation Theory and Applications ", Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Groover M.P. and Zimmers E.W.Jr.," CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and
Manufacturing", Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Harrison H.B., “Structural Analysis and Design VolI and II”, Pergamon Press, 1991.

3. Hinton .Eand Owen D.R.J., “Finite Element Programming”, Academic Press 1977.

4. Richard Forsyth (Ed.), “Expert System Principles and Case Studies”, Chapman and Hall, 1996.
WEB RESOURCES:
3. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/106/105106202/
4. https://www.usb.ac.ir/FileStaff/5128_2020-2-8-17-56-58.pdf

82
 CE606107 – MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the maintenance and repair.
• To learn the strength and durability of concrete.
• To study the repair materials and special types of concrete.
• To study the production methods and health monitoring systems.
• To learn the various types cracks method and demolitions procedures.

UNIT 1 - MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES 9

Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation, retrofit and strengthening, need for rehabilitation of
structures- Service life behaviour - importance of Maintenance, causes and effects of deterioration.
Non-destructive Testing Techniques

UNIT 2 - STRENGTH AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE 9

Quality assurance for concrete based on Strength, Durability and Microstructure of concrete - NDT
techniques- Cracks- different types, causes – Effects due to Environment, Fire, Earthquake, Corrosion
of steel in concrete, Mechanism, quantification of corrosion damage
UNIT 3 - REPAIR MATERIALS AND SPECIAL CONCRETES 9
Repair materials-Various repair materials, Criteria for material selection, Methodology of selection,
Special mortars and concretes- Polymer Concrete and Grouting materials- Bonding agents-Latex
emulsions, Epoxy bonding agents, Protective coatings-Protective coatings for
Concrete and Steel, FRP sheets.
UNIT 4 - PROTECTION MONITORING METHODS AND STRUCTURAL HEALTH 9
Concrete protection methods – reinforcement protection methods- cathodic protection - Sacrificial
anode - Corrosion protection techniques – Corrosion inhibitors, concrete coatings- Corrosion resistant
steels, Coatings to reinforcement, Structural health monitoring.
UNIT 5 - REPAIR, RETROFITTING AND DEMOLITION OF STRUCTURES 9
Various methods of crack repair, Grouting, Routing and sealing, Stitching, Dry packing, Autogenous
healing, Repair to active cracks, Repair to dormant cracks. Repair of various corrosion damaged of
structural elements (slab, beam and columns) Jacketing Techniques, Strengthening Methods for
Structural Elements. Engineered Demolition -Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

83
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the importance of maintenance assessment and repair strategies.
CO2: Acquire knowledge of strength and durability properties and their effects due to
climate and temperature.
CO3: Gain knowledge of recent developments in repair.
CO4: Applying the testing techniques for repair and protection methods
CO5: Explain the repair, rehabilitation and retrofitting of structures and demolition methods

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 2 3 - - - 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1
CO2
3 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 1 - 2 2 1
CO3
3 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 1 - 2 2 1
CO4 - - -
2 2 3 1 1 1 1 - 2 2 1
CO5 - - -
2 2 3 1 1 1 1 - 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Shetty.M.S. Jain A K., Concrete Technology - Theory and Practice, S.Chand and

Company, 8th Edition , 2019

2. Vidivelli B, Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures Standard Publishes Distribution.1st

Edition 2009.

3. Varghese P. C, Maintenance Repair and Rehabilitation & Minor works of building,

Prentice Hall India Pvt Ltd 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ravishankar.K. Krishnamurthy. T.S, Structural Health Monitoring, Repair and

Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures, Allied Publishers, 2004.

2. Dodge Woodson, Concrete Structures, Protection, Repair and Rehabilitation,

Butterworth-Heinemann, Elsevier, New Delhi 2012.

3. Hand Book on “Repair and Rehabilitation of RCC Buildings” – Director General works

CPWD, Govt of India, New Delhi – 2002.

WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc20/SEM1/noc20-ce26/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ce12/preview

84
 CE606108 – DESIGN OF MASONRY STRUCTURES (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To enable learning of theories on mechanical behaviour of masonry assemblages.
• To learn the present working stress and limit states.
• To learn the unreinforced, reinforced and confined masonry structures.
• To study the vertical and lateral loads, including earthquake loads.
• To review procedures for structural assessment and strengthening of existing masonry
structures.

UNIT 1 - MASONRY CONSTRUCTION UNITS, MATERIALS, TYPES & MASONRY 9

Brick, stone and block masonry units – strength, modulus of elasticity and water absorption of
masonry materials – classification and properties of mortars, selection of mortars. Defects and errors
in masonry construction, cracks in masonry, types, reasons for cracking, methods of avoiding cracks.

UNIT 2 - STRENGTH AND STABILITY 9

Strength and Stability of concentrically loaded masonry walls, effect of unit strength, mortar strength,
joint thickness, rate of absorption, and effect of curing, effect of ageing, workmanship, strength
formulae and mechanism of failure for masonry subjected to Axial compression, eccentric
compression, direct and flexural tension, shear and compression, biaxial state of stresses, P-M
interaction and Deformation characteristics.
UNIT 3 - DESIGN OF REINFORCED MASONRY 9
Basic principles and methods of reinforcing, Working stress and limit states design, Serviceability
limit states (deflection, cracking), Design for combined out-of-plane bending and axial compression,
Design for in-plane flexure.
UNIT 4 - DESIGN OF MASONRY WALLS AND REINFORCED MASONRY 9
Detailing requirements, International design standards and Multi-storey building design. Confined
masonry: Development and application, Configuration, Response under seismic loads, Seismic
resistance verification, Design of load bearing masonry for building up to 3 storeys using IS : 1905
and SP : 20 procedure. Application, flexural and compression elements, shear walls.
UNIT 5 - MASONRY WALLS IN COMPOSITE ACTION 9
Infilled frames - behaviour - modelling and design - composite wall-beam elements- assessment and
strengthening of existing masonry structure.

85
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Acquired the knowledge about masonry types, properties and construction method.
CO2: Analysis the strength and stability of masonry structures.
CO3: Design the reinforced masonry structures.
CO4: Develop the application of masonry wall and reinforced masonry.
CO5: Design the composite wall.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2
3 3 2 2 - 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO3
3 3 3 3 - 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 -
3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 -
3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Drysdale, R.G., Hamid, A.A., and Baker, L.R., Masonry Structures: Behaviour and
Design, Prentice Hall, 1994, 2nd Edition.

2. Taly, N., Design of Reinforced Masonry Structures, Mc-Graw Hill Companies, 2010, 2nd
Edition.

3. Klingner, R E, Masonry Structural Design, McGraw-Hill Companies, 2017, 2nd Edition.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Priestley, M.J.N. and Paulay, T., Seismic Design and Assessment of Reinforced Concrete
and Masonry Buildings, John Wiley and Sons, 1997.

2. IS 1905 Code of Practice for Structural use of Unreinforced Masonry, Bureau of Indian
Standards

3. SP 20: 1981 Explanatory Handbook on Masonry Code, Bureau of Indian Standards.

WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/106/105106197/
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KZGNmzH7IdA

86
 CE606109 – REINFORCED CONCRETE ROAD BRIDGE (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce bridge structures & their types
• To learn loading and response condition of bridge.
• To study the bridge deck analysis and lateral load distribution.
• To make capable to analyse and design simple reinforced concrete slab bridge.
• To make capable to analyse and design simple reinforced concrete T beam bridge

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Bridge and its components - Types of bridges and their characteristics - Selection of bridge type -
Essential design data and their acquisition - General design requirements – IRC loading – Design
codes.

UNIT 2 - BRIDGE LOADING AND RESPONSES 9

Bridge Loads - Bridge Responses - Working stress method – Limit state method of design as per IS
456-2000 and IRC 112-2011.
UNIT 3 - BRIDGE DECK ANALYSIS AND LATERAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION 9
General principle and methods of bridge deck analysis Effective Width Method - Courbon's Method
- Distribution Coefficient Method - Hendry Jaeger Method - Longitudinal and lateral positioning of
moving loads and response calculation.
UNIT 4 - DESIGN OF RC SLAB BRIDGE 9
General principle – classification – component - Design of RC Slab Bridge - Design of abutment.
UNIT 5 - DESIGN OF RC BEAM BRIDGE 9
General principle – classification – component - Design of RC T beam bridge.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

87
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Acquired the knowledge about selection of bridge and design codes using.
CO2: Apply the loading condition and response of bridge as IS Codes.
CO3: Analysis the bridge deck methods and load distribution.
CO4: Design the reinforced concrete slab bridge
CO5: Design the reinforced concrete T beam bridge

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 2 3 2 - 2 2 1 - 1 1 2 2 1
CO2
3 2 2 2 - 2 2 1 - 1 1 2 2 1
CO3
3 3 3 3 - 2 2 1 - 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 1
3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1
CO5 1
3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Victor, D.J, "Essential of Bridge Engineering", Oxford and IBH Publishing Company, New
Delhi 2017

2. Rakshit, R.S, "Design and Construction of Highway Bridges", New Central Book
Agency, New Delhi 2004

3. Klingner, R E, Masonry Structural Design, McGraw-Hill Companies, 2017, 2nd Edition.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Priestley, M.J.N. and Paulay, T., Seismic Design and Assessment of Reinforced Concrete and
Masonry Buildings, John Wiley and Sons, 1997.

2. Raina V K, "Concrete Bridge Practice: Construction, Maintenance and Rehabilitation", Tata

McGraw – Hill 1988.

3. Standard Specifications and Codes of Practices for Road Bridges, IRC 5, 6, 21, 22, 24, 40,
78, 83
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/105/105105165/
2. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/105105165/L14.html

88
 CE606110 – FINITE ELEMENT METHOD AND COMPUTATIONAL STRUCTURAL
DYNAMICS (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To have the knowledge on Differential Equations & Solutions
• To have the knowledge on Finite Elements of 1D
• To identifying the Finite Elements of 2D & 3D
• To provides knowledge on Numerical Solution of Initial Value Problems
• To identifying the Discrete Fourier Transform
UNIT 1 - MATHEMATICAL MODELLING, DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND
9
APPROXIMATE SOLUTIONS
Mathematical Modelling in Engineering - Approximation via Method of Weighted Residuals -
Approximation via Variational Principles - Convergence of the Approximate Solution - From
Continua to Discontinua.

UNIT 2 - FINITE ELEMENTS OF ONE-DIMENSION 9

Introduction - Finite Elements of C0 Continuity - Finite Elements of C1 Continuity - Finite Element
Modelling for Shear Flexible Beams - Finite Element Modelling for Beam & Column - Finite Element
Modelling for Grillage System
UNIT 3 - FINITE ELEMENTS OF TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS 9
Weighted Residual Formulation and the Weak Form - Approximations for Two-Dimensional
Elasticity - Finite Elements for Two-Dimensional Domains - Finite Elements for Three- Dimensional
Domains - Development of Finite Element Equations
UNIT 4 - TIME MARCHING: NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF INITIAL VALUE
9
PROBLEMS
Introduction - Methods based on Taylor Series Expansion - Direct Methods for Vibration Problems -
Analysis of Time Marching Schemes (Stability of Single-Step Methods & Consistency of Single-Step
Methods)
UNIT 5 - DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM 9
Introduction - Discrete Time Data - Discrete Fourier Transform - Fast (Finite) Fourier Transform -
DFT Applications (Convolution and Deconvolution & Vibration Data Processing)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

89
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Develop Differential Equations & Solutions
CO2: Modeling in Finite Elements of 1D
CO3: Analyze Finite Elements of 2D & 3D
CO4: Analyze the Numerical Solution of Initial Value Problems
CO5: Discrete Fourier Transform

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2
3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3
3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4
3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5
3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Finite Element Method and Computational Structural Dynamics-Phi-Shrikhande, Manish-

2014-Edn-1

2. R.D. Cook, D.S. Malkus and M.E. Plesha, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element
Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.

3. O.C. Zienkiewicz, R.L. Taylor and J.Z. Zhu, Finite Element Method Its Basis and
Fundamentals, Elsevier, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. P. Seshu, Textbook of Finite Element Analysis, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2003.

2. T.R. Chandrupatla and A.D. Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,

Prentice Hall, 2003.

3. K.J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2002.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/107/105107209/
2. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-finite-element-method-variational-methods-
to-computer-programming-19868

90
VERTICALS 2
 CE606201 – CONSTRUCTION PLANNING AND SCHEDULING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study and understand the concept of planning.
• To impart concepts in Network representation and analysis.
• To impart concepts in Precedence Network analysis.
• To impart concepts in resource scheduling.
• To learn Concepts in project monitoring and controlling.

UNIT 1 - CONSTRUCTION PLANNING 9

Basic Concepts in the Development of Construction Plans – Choice of Technology and Construction
Method – Defining Work Tasks and Work Break down Levels – Defining Precedence Relationships
among Activities – Estimating Activity Durations – Estimating Resource Requirements for Work
Activities – Coding Systems - Planning Project Schedule and Budget.

UNIT 2 - NETWORK REPRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS 9

Duration Estimation – Gantt / Bar Chart – Types of Network and Techniques – Introduction to
Floats, Types of Floats, usage of Floats for Project Decisions - Presenting Project Schedules –
Scheduling for Activity-on-Node and with Leads, Lags, and Windows – Critical Path Method
(CPM) Network Analysis - PERT Network Modelling and Time Analysis - Case Illustrations.
UNIT 3 - PRECEDENCE NETWORK ANALYSIS 9
Introduction to Precedence Diagramming Method (PDM) - PDM network representation, Procedure
and Analysis, Issues in PDM, Case Illustrations, Defining Relationship, Project Monitoring and
Control Process.
UNIT 4 - SCHEDULING PROJECT WORK AND RESOURCE SCHEDULING 9
Work Scheduling Fundamentals – Bar chart method of Work scheduling – Network Based Project
Scheduling – Line of Balance Scheduling for Repetitive Projects - Scheduling with Uncertain
Durations – Resources Scheduling Considerations – Crashing and Time/Cost Trade-offs- Case
Illustrations – Use of Project management Software for scheduling Process.
UNIT 5 - PROJECT MONITORING AND CONTROLLING 9
The Cost Control Approach – Direct and Indirect Cost Control – Activity Cost Control – Financial
Accounting Systems and Cost Accounts – Control of Project Cash Flows - Performance Control using
Earned Value Management Concepts – Time progress monitoring and Controlling – Time Reduction

91
Techniques – Guidelines for reviewing project Time and Cost Progress.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Identify and estimate the activity in the construction.
CO2: Schedule the networking of activities using the critical path method.
CO3: Evaluate the project budget required for the particular construction project.
CO4: Recognize the various quality control tool required in the construction industry.
CO5: Explain the different databases that can be maintained in the construction industry
using computers.
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
2 1 3 - 1 - 1 - 2 2 1 - 1 1
CO2
2 2 2 - 1 - 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
CO3
1 1 1 - - - 2 - - 3 2 1 1 1
CO4 -
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 -
1 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Albert Lester, Project Management, Planning and Control, 7th Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, USA, 2017.
2. Chitkara K K., Construction project management, planning, scheduling and control,McGraw
Hill (INDIA) publishers, New Delhi, third edition 2014.
3. Chris Hendrickson and Tung Au, Project Management for Construction – Fundamental
Concepts for Owners, Engineers, Architects and Builders, Prentice Hall, Pittsburgh, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Calin M. Popescu, Chotchai Charoenngam, Project Planning, Scheduling and Control in
Construction: An Encyclopaedia of terms and Applications, Wiley, New York, 1995.
2. Halpin, D. W., Financial and Cost Concepts for Construction Management, John Wiley&
Sons,New York, 1985.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/construction-project-management/project-planning-
and-scheduling-ylsgt
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/103/105103093/

92
 CE606202 – ENERGY CONSERVATION METHODS IN CONSTRUCTION
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide an understanding of the concept of energy consumption in buildings.
• To optimize passive solar performance and energy efficiency.
• Develop skills in evaluating site-specific conditions.
• Implementing heat control and ventilation strategies.
• To optimize energy efficiency, thermal comfort, and indoor environmental quality across
different climatic regions.

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION 9
Climate adapted and climate rejecting buildings – Heat Transfer – Measuring Conduction – Thermal
Storage – Measurement of Radiation – The Greenhouse Effect – Convection – Measuring latent and
sensible heat – Psychrometry Chart – Thermal Comfort – Microclimate, Site Planning and
Development – Temperature – Humidity – Wind – Optimum Site Locations – Sun Path Diagrams –
Sun Protection – Types of Shading Devices – Design responses to energy conservation strategies.

UNIT 2 - PASSIVE SOLAR HEATING AND COOLING 9

General Principles of passive Solar Heating – Key Design Elements – Sunspace – Direct gain –Trombe
Walls, Water Walls – Convective Air loops – Concepts – Case Studies – General Principles of Passive
Cooling – Ventilation – Principles – Case studies – Courtyards – Roof Ponds– Cool Pools – Predicting
ventilation in buildings – Window Ventilation Calculations – Room Organization Strategies for Cross
and Stack Ventilation – Radiation – Evaporation and dehumidification – Wind Catchers –Mass Effect
– Zoning – Load Control – Air Filtration and odor removal.
UNIT 3 - DAYLIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL LIGHTING 9
Materials, components and details – Insulation – Optical materials – Radiant Barriers – Glazing
materials – Glazing Spectral Response – Day lighting – Sources and concepts – Building Design
Strategies – Case Studies – Daylight apertures – Light Shelves – Codal requirements – Day lighting
design – Electric Lighting – Light Distribution – Electric Lighting control for day lighted buildings –
Switching controls – Coefficient of utilization – Electric Task Lighting – Electric Light Zones – Power
Adjustment Factors.
UNIT 4 - HEAT CONTROL AND VENTILATION 9
Hourly Solar radiation – Heat insulation – Terminology – Requirements – Heat transmission through

93
building sections – Thermal performance of Building sections – Orientation of buildings – Building
characteristics for various climates – Thermal Design of buildings – Influence of Design Parameters
– Mechanical controls – Examples. Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation
–Ventilation Design – Energy Conservation in Ventilating systems – Design for Natural Ventilation
– Calculation of probable indoor wind speed
UNIT 5 - DESIGN FOR CLIMATIC ZONES 9
Energy efficiency – An Overview of Design Concepts and Architectural Interventions – Embodied
Energy – Low Embodied Energy Materials – Passive Downdraft Evaporative Cooling – Design of
Energy Efficient Buildings for Various Zones – Cold and cloudy – Cold and sunny – Composite – Hot
and dry – Moderate – Warm and humid – Case studies of residences, office buildings and other
buildings in each zones – Commonly used software packages in energy efficient building analysis and
design - Energy Audit – Certification.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain environmental energy supplies on buildings
CO2: Explain the passive solar heating, cooling system
CO3: Discuss the various aspects of day-lighting and electrical lighting in a building
CO4: Predict and design building ventilation and heat control for indoor comfort
CO5: Design a building for climatic zone and apply simulation programs of buildings to perform
energy calculations

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
1 2 1 - 1 2 3 - 1 - 1 1 2 2
CO2
2 1 - - 2 1 2 - - - 1 1 3 2
CO3
1 1 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 2 1 2 1
CO4 1
1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 2
CO5 3
3 1 - 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Conservation Building Code, cau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Buildings Part 1 to 4 SP : 41 ( S and T) 1995
3. Residential Energy: Cost Savings and Comfort for Existing Buildings by John Krigger and
Chris Dorsi, Published by Saturn Resource Management, 2013.

94
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Majumdar, M (Ed), Energy - Efficient Buildings in India, Tata Energy Research Institute,
Ministry of Non-Conventional Energy Sources, 2009.
2. Brown, G.Z. and DeKay, M., Sun, Wind and Light - Architectural Design Strategies, John
Wiley and Sons Inc,3rd Edition, 2014
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://elearn.nptel.ac.in/shop/iit-workshops/completed/design-principles-of-building-
energy-conservation/
2. https://www.dexma.com/blog-en/10-ways-to-reduce-energy-consumption-on construction-
sites/

95
 CE606203 – ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study and understand the latest construction techniques applied to engineering
construction for sub structure, super structure, special structures, rehabilitation and
strengthening techniques and demolition techniques.

UNIT 1 – SUB STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION 9

Construction Methodology - Box jacking - Pipe jacking - Under water construction of diaphragm walls
and basement - Tunneling techniques - Piling techniques - Driving well and caisson - sinking
cofferdam - cable anchoring and grouting - Driving diaphragm walls, Sheet piles - Laying operations
for built up offshore system - Shoring for deep cutting - Large reservoir construction - well points -
Dewatering for underground open excavation.

UNIT 2 - SUPER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION FOR BUILDINGS 9

Vacuum dewatering of concrete flooring – Concrete paving technology – Techniques of construction
for continuous concreting operation in tall buildings of various shapes and varying sections – Erection
techniques of tall structures, Large span structures – launching techniques for heavy decks – in-situ
prestressing in high rise structures, Post tensioning of slab- aerial transporting – Handling and erecting
lightweight components on tall structures.
UNIT 3 - CONSTRUCTION OF SPECIAL STRUCTURES 9
Erection of lattice towers - Rigging of transmission line structures – Construction sequence in cooling
towers, Silos, chimney, sky scrapers - Bow string bridges, Cable stayed bridges – Launching and
pushing of box decks – Construction of jetties and break water structures – Construction sequence and
methods in domes – Support structure for heavy equipment and machinery in heavy industries –
Erection of articulated structures and space decks.
UNIT 4 - REHABILITATION AND STRENGTHENING TECHNIQUES 9
Seismic retrofitting - Strengthening of beams - Strengthening of columns - Strengthening of slab -
Strengthening of masonry wall, Protection methods of structures, Mud jacking and grouting for
foundation – Micro piling and underpinning for strengthening floor and shallow profile - Sub grade
water proofing, Soil Stabilization techniques.
UNIT 5 - DEMOLITION 9
Demolition Techniques, Demolition by Machines, Demolition by Explosives, Advanced techniques

96
using Robotic Machines, Demolition Sequence, Dismantling Techniques, Safety precaution in
Demolition and Dismantling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the modern construction techniques used in the sub structure construction.
CO2: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the principles and concepts relevant to
super structure construction for buildings
CO3: Understand the concepts used in the construction of special structures
CO4: Knowledge on Various strengthening and repair methods for different cases
CO5: Identify the suitable demolition technique for demolishing a building

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
1 2 1 - 2 2 3 2 - 1 2 1 2 2
CO2
2 1 3 - 1 1 - 1 - 2 3 2 1 3
CO3
1 2 1 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 2 2 1 3
CO4 -
2 2 - 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 1
1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jerry Irvine, Advanced Construction Techniques, CA Rocket, 1984
2. Patrick Powers. J., Construction Dewatering: New Methods and Applications, John Wiley &
Sons, 1992.
3. Peter H.Emmons, “Concrete repair and maintenance illustrated”, Galgotia Publications Pvt.
Ltd., 2001.Press, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robertwade Brown, Practical foundation engineering hand book, McGraw Hill
Publications,1995.
2. Sankar, S.K. and Saraswati, S., Construction Technology, Oxford University, New Delhi,
2008
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.civilengineeringweb.com/advanced-construction-technologies/page/3

97
 CE606204- GREEN CONSTRUCTION
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To analyze the social and economic implications of unsustainable building practices, including
health impacts, economic costs, and social equity considerations.
• To minimize embodied energy and enhance the sustainability of the built environment.
• To integrate comfort considerations into architectural design processes and building codes.
• To design and implement solar energy solutions that meet building energy needs.
• To create resilient, energy-efficient, and environmentally friendly built environments.

UNIT 1 – ENVIRONMENTAL IMPLICATIONS OF BUILDINGS 9

Energy use, carbon emissions, water use, waste disposal; Building materials: sources, methods of
production and environmental Implications. Embodied Energy in Building Materials: Transportation
Energy for Building Materials; Maintenance Energy for Buildings.
UNIT 2 - IMPLICATIONS OF BUILDING TECHNOLOGIES EMBODIED ENERGY 9
OF BUILDINGS
Framed Construction, Masonry Construction. Resources for Building Materials, Alternative concepts.
Recycling of Industrial and Buildings Wastes. Biomass Resources for buildings.
UNIT 3 - COMFORTS IN BUILDING 9
Thermal Comfort in Buildings- Issues; Heat Transfer Characteristic of Building Materials and
Building Techniques. Incidence of Solar Heat on Buildings-Implications of Geographical Locations.
UNIT 4 - UTILITY OF SOLAR ENERGY IN BUILDINGS 9
Utility of Solar energy in buildings concepts of Solar Passive Cooling and Heating of Buildings. Low
Energy Cooling. Case studies of Solar Passive Cooled and Heated Buildings.
UNIT 5 - GREEN COMPOSITES FOR BUILDINGS 9
Concepts of Green Composites. Water Utilisation in Buildings, Low Energy Approaches to Water
Management. Management of Solid Wastes. Management of Sullage Water and Sewage. Urban
Environment and Green Buildings. Green Cover and Built Environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

98
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Evaluate the environmental implications of buildings.
CO2: Evaluate the ideologies of implications on building technologies embodied energy of
buildings.
CO3: Evaluate the concepts of comforts in buildings.
CO4: Understand the utility of solar energy in buildings.
CO5: Create the basic ideas of green composites for buildings.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
1 3 - 2 2 2 2 1 - 1 1 1 3 1
CO2
1 2 - 1 1 1 2 2 - 2 2 1 2 2
CO3
1 3 1 1 2 - 3 3 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO4 1
2 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO5 2
1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Green Building, A to Z Paperback – Import, 1 October 2007 by Jerry Yudelson, New Society
Publishers.
2. Building Green: A Complete How-to Guide to Alternative Building Methods Paperback –
Import, 28 January 2006 by Clarke Snell, Lark Books Publications
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Integrated Design for Sustainable Building: Principles and Practice Hardcover
– Import, 5 June 2009 by Marian Keeler, Bill Burke, John Wiley & Sonspublishers.
2. The HOK Guidebook to Sustainable Design Hardcover – Import, 9 December 2005 by Sandra
F. Mendler, William Odell, Mary Ann Lazarus, John Wiley & Sons publishers.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://archive.epa.gov/greenbuilding/web/html/

99
 CE606205 – ENVIRONEMTNAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ENGINEERS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart the knowledge and skills required for understanding the various impacts of infrastructure
projects on the environment.
• To impart knowledge about prediction and assessment of EIA.
• To impart the knowledge of health and socio-economic impact assessment.
• To impart the knowledge and expose the students to the various methodologies available to assess.
• To impart the knowledge to develop the skill to prepare Environmental Impact Assessment Report.

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION 9
Sustainable Development challenges and needs - Key approaches for Impact Assessment – EIA
approach: historical development - Legal and Regulatory aspects in India - Types and Objectives,
Components, Process of EIA.

UNIT 2 - PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9

Prediction and Assessment: tools - impact on air, water, soil & Noise - Role of Biodiversity impact
Assessment - Identification, Prediction and Evaluation of Impacts on Biodiversity - Techniques of
Biodiversity impact assessment - EIA Report Preparation - Environmental Management Plan:
Preparation and implementation - Mitigation and Rehabilitation plans – Post Project Audit.
UNIT 3 - HEALTH AND SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT 9
Health Assessment: Impact of Environment on Health - Developing framework for Health impact
analysis, tools, and techniques - Socio-Economic Impact Assessment: Overview and Scope of Social
Impact Assessment - SIA model and the planning process - Land acquisition: Legal aspects, Resettlement
& Rehabilitation, and Development.
UNIT 4 - INTEGRATED ANALYSIS 9

Integrated Analysis of Environmental, Social, and Health Impacts - Challenges for Integrated Approach
- Scope for Integrated approach in economic analysis - CBA, Social CBA, and Cost effectiveness
Analysis - Analytic Hierarchy process-based Approach – Emerging Dimensions and Future Directions.

UNIT 5 - IMPACT OF INFRASTRUCTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES 9

Case Studies: EIA for Mining, extraction of natural resources and power generation - Primary Processing
and Material Production - Material Processing, Manufacturing/Fabrication - Service Sectors - Physical

100
Infrastructure including Environmental Services - Building and Construction Projects - Area
Development Projects and Townships - Strategic Environmental Assessment, Technological
Assessment, and Risk Assessment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply the knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals to sustainable development
challenges.
CO2: Explain the identification, prediction, and evaluation of impacts that will be caused by
projects or industries on biodiversity.

CO3: Identify the legal requirements of environmental impact assessment for projects.
CO4: Develop the ability to perform integrated analysis by considering environmental, social,
and health impacts.
CO5: Select appropriate methods for environmental impact assessment for Infrastructure and
environmental service.
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 - 2 - 2 1 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO2 1 3 2 - 1 - 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 2 - 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 - 1 2 1 1 1
CO5 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anjaneyulu, Yerramilli, and Valli Manickam, “Environmental impact assessment methodologies”,
Hyderabad: BS Publications, Third Edition 2022.
2. Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical Solutions to recurrentproblems”, Wiley-
Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.
3. Petts, J., "Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment', Vol., I and II, Blackwell Science,
London, 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996.
2. World Bank – Source Book on Environmental Impact Assessment, 2010
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/228322154_Environmental_Impact_Assessment_of
_Civil_Engineering_Infrastructure_Development_Projects

101
 CE606206 – PROJECT FORMULATION AND APPRAISAL
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To demonstrate proficiency in project formulation.
• To identifying cost components, collecting relevant data, and applying cost estimation
techniques.
• To evaluate the feasibility, viability, and potential impacts of projects across various sectors.
• To negotiate financing terms and manage financial relationships.
• To advocate for and facilitate private sector participation in projects.

UNIT 1 - PROJECT FORMULATION 9

Project – Concepts – Capital investments - Generation and Screening of Project Ideas - Project
identification – Preliminary Analysis, Market, Technical, Financial, Economic and Ecological - Pre
Feasibility Report and its Clearance, Project Estimates and Techno-Economic Feasibility Report,
Detailed Project Report – Different Project Clearances required.

UNIT 2 - PROJECT COSTING 9

Project Cash Flows – Principles – Types – New Project and Replacement Project – Biases in Cash
flow Estimation – Time Value of Money – Present Value – Future Value – Single amount - Annuity
– Cost of Capital – Cost of Debt, Preference, Equity – Proportions - Cost of Capital Calculation –
Financial Institutions Considerations.
UNIT 3 - PROJECT APPRAISAL 9
NPV – BCR – IRR – ARR – Urgency – Pay Back Period – Assessment of Various Methods – Indian
Practice of Investment Appraisal – International Practice of Appraisal – Analysis of Risk – Different
Methods – Selection of a Project and Risk Analysis in Practice.
UNIT 4 - PROJECT FINANCING 9
Project Financing – Means of Finance – Financial Institutions – Special Schemes – Key Financial
Indicators – Ratios – financial cost-benefit analysis, social-cost benefit analysis.
UNIT 5 - PRIVATE SECTOR PARTICIPATION 9
Private sector participation in Infrastructure Development Projects - BOT, BOLT, BOOT-
Technology Transfer and Foreign Collaboration - Scope of Technology Transfer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

102
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Perform Formulations Of Projects
CO2: Analyze Project Costing
CO3: Evaluate Project Appraisal
CO4: Apply Project Financing
CO5: Perform Private Sector Participation & Implementation

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 - - - 2 2 1 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 - 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 1 2 - 2 1 1 - 1 2 2 - 1 1
CO5 1 2 2 - - 2 2 2 - 1 1 - 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Barcus, S.W. and Wilkinson.J.W., Hand Book of Management Consulting Services,
McGraw Hill, New York, first edition, 1995.
2. Joy P.K., Total Project Management - The Indian Context, New Delhi, Laxmi Publications
Pvt. Ltd, First edition 2017.
3. Prasanna Chandra., Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation Review,
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi., Ninth edition, 2019.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. United Nations Industrial Development Organisation (UNIDO) Manual for the Preparation of
Industrial Feasibility Studies, (IDBI Reproduction) Bombay, 1995.
2. Raina V.K, “Construction Management Practice – The inside Story”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Limited, 2005
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.academia.edu/6310590/Preparation_of_project_project_Identification_and_form
ulation_project_appraisal_and_sources_of_Finance

103
 CE606207 – MODERN CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding and evaluating structural materials used in construction.
• To integrate innovative and sustainable materials and finishes into architectural design and
construction practices.
• To design, fabricate, and test composite components and structures.
• To analyze the performance, durability, and sustainability of different special concretes under
various loading conditions.
• To enhance performance, efficiency, and functionality in diverse engineering and
manufacturing domains.

UNIT 1 - STRUCTURAL MATERIALS 9

Wood and Wood Product - Metals - Types of Steels – Manufacturing process of steel – Advantages
of new alloy steels – Properties and advantages of aluminum and its products – Types of Coatings &
Coatings to reinforcement – Applications of Coatings.

UNIT 2 - NON-STRUCTURAL MATERIALS, ASSOCESSORIES AND FINISHES 9

Introduction of Non-Structural Materials and Criteria for Selection - Types and properties of Water
Proofing Materials – Types of Non-weathering Materials and its uses – Types of Polymer Floor
Finishes - Paint - Tiles - Acoustic Treatment materials - Dry Walls - Anchors.
UNIT 3 - COMPOSITES 9
Types of Plastics – Polymer - Properties & Manufacturing process – Advantages of Reinforced
polymers – Types of FRP – FRP on different structural elements – Applications of FRP - Bituminous
Materials - Glass - Closure - Environmental Concerns.
UNIT 4 - SPECIAL CONCRETES 9
Concretes - Behavior of concretes – Properties and Advantages of High Strength and High
Performance Concrete – Properties and Applications of Fibre Reinforced Concrete, Self- compacting
concrete, Geo Polymer Concrete, Alternate Materials to concrete on high performance & high Strength
concrete.
UNIT 5 - SMART AND INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9
Types & Differences between Smart and Intelligent Materials – Special features – Nano Concrete -
Nano Technology in Construction - Case studies showing the applications of smart & Intelligent

104
Materials.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the various types of special concretes
CO2: Select the different processing of steel and applications of coating
CO3: Explain the manufacturing process and applications of polymer composites
CO4: Identify the different flooring materials and application of façade materials
CO5: Apply the knowledge of smart and intelligent materials in construction field

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 2 - 3 2 2 - 3 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 2 - 2 3 3 - 2 2 - 1 2
CO3 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 - 1 1 - 2 1
CO4 1 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.Subramanian ,”Building Materials Testing and Sustainability”, Oxford Higher Education,
2. Shetty M.S, Concrete Technology: Theory and Practice, S.Chand & Company Ltd., 2019
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ganapathy, C. “Modern Construction Materials”, Eswar Press, 2015.
2. SanthakumarA.R. “Concrete Technology”, Oxford University press, New Delhi, 2006.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.planradar.com/gb/top-15-innovative-construction-materials/
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/106/105106053/

105
 CE606208 – BASIC CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding and utilizing stones, bricks, and concrete blocks in construction applications.
• Understanding and utilizing lime, cement, aggregates, and mortar in construction
applications.
• To gain a comprehensive understanding of the properties, characteristics, and applications of
concrete.
• Understanding and evaluating timber and other materials used in construction applications.
• Understanding and evaluating various modern materials used in construction applications.
UNIT 1 - STONES – BRICKS – CONCRETE BLOCKS 9
Stone as building material – Criteria for selection – Tests on stones – Deterioration and Preservation
of stone work – Bricks – Classification – Manufacturing of clay bricks – Tests on bricks –
Compressive Strength – Water Absorption – Efflorescence – Bricks for special use – Refractory bricks
– Concrete blocks – Lightweight concrete blocks.

UNIT 2 - LIME – CEMENT – AGGREGATES – MORTAR 9

Lime – Preparation of lime mortar – Cement – Ingredients – Manufacturing process – Types and
Grades – Properties of cement and Cement mortar – Hydration – Compressive strength – Tensile
strength – Fineness– Soundness and consistency – Setting time – fine aggregates – river sand – crushed
stone sand – properties – coarse Aggregates – Crushing strength – Impact strength – Flakiness Index
– Elongation Index – Abrasion Resistance – Grading
UNIT 3 - CONCRETE 9
Concrete – Ingredients – Manufacturing Process – Batching plants –mixing – transporting – placing
– compaction of concrete –curing and finishing – Ready mix Concrete – Mix specification.
UNIT 4 - TIMBER AND OTHER MATERIALS 9
Timber – Market forms – Industrial timber– Plywood – Veneer – Thermocol – Panels of laminates –
Steel – Aluminum and Other Metallic Materials – Composition – Aluminium composite panel –
Market forms – Mechanical treatment – Paints – Varnishes – Distempers – Bitumens.
UNIT 5 - MODERN MATERIALS 9
Glass – Ceramics – Sealants for joints – Fibre glass reinforced plastic – Clay products – Refractories
– Composite materials – Types – Applications of laminar composites – Fibre textiles– Geomembranes

106
and Geotextiles for earth reinforcement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Compare the properties of most common and advanced building materials.
CO2: Understand the typical and potential applications of lime, cement and aggregates
CO3: Know the production of concrete and also the method of placing and making of concrete
elements
CO4: Understand the applications of timbers and other materials
CO5: Understand the importance of modern material for construction.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 3 - 2 - 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 1 1 2 - 1 - 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2
CO3 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 2 1 2 1 2 - 2
CO4 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2
CO5 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Varghese.P.C, "Building Materials", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Rajput. R.K., "Engineering Materials", S. Chand and Company Ltd., 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jagadish.K.S, "Alternative Building Materials Technology", New Age International, 2007.
2. Gambhir. M.L., & Neha Jamwal., "Building Materials, products, properties and
systems",Tata McGraw Hill Educations Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.classcentral.com/course/youtube-civil-building-materials-and-construction-
47666

107
 CE606209 – DEVELOPMENT AND APPLICATION OF SPECIAL CONCRETE (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the proper mixing proportion of normal concrete.
• To know the curing methods of normal and special concrete.
• To know the uses and application of specific concrete.
• To know the uses and application of fibre reinforced concrete.
• To know the proper mixing proportion of special concrete.

UNIT 1 - NORMAL CONCRETE 9

Concrete as composite materials- Basic properties over fresh concrete- Basic properties over hardened
concrete – fundamentals of proportioning concrete mixes – analysis and adjustments – pores and
porosity in concrete- admixtures in concrete.

UNIT 2 - CONCRETE CURING METHODS 9

Curing of concrete – cold weather concreting- hot weather concreting – importance of right methods
and specifications-heat of hydration of cement and thermal stresses- antiwashout underwater
concrete- concreting underwater-roller compacted concrete.
UNIT 3 - SELF COMPACTING CONCRETE 9
Introduction to concrete – its proportion- mixing – strength and properties - uses – applications
UNIT 4 - FIBRE – REINFORCED CONCRETE 9
Introduction to fibre reinforced concrete– its proportion- mixture strength and properties – uses –
applications
UNIT 5 - SPECIAL CONCRETE 9
Shotcrete- High Strength Concrete – using polymers in concrete – improving the quality of cover
concrete – compaction of concrete – precast concrete
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

108
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Evaluate the normal concrete uses and its methodologies.
CO2: Create the concepts of concrete curing methods.
CO3: Understand the concepts of self compacting concrete its proportions, uses and applications.
CO4: Understand the concepts of fibre reinforced concrete its proportions, uses and applications.
CO5: Understand the concepts of special concrete its proportions, uses and applications.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 2 1 - 2 1 - 2 - 1 2 2
CO2 2 3 3 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 - 2 3 3
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - 1 1 - 1 2 1 2 1
CO4 1 2 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 1 1 1 1 - 2 - - 2 - 1 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mehta, P.K., and Monteiro P.J.M., Concrete – Microstructure, Properties and Materials, 3 rd
Edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 2006
2. Neville, A.M., Properties of concrete, 5 th Edition, Pitman Publishers, New Delhi, India1996.
3. Shetty, M.S., Concrete Technology (Theory and Practice), 7 th Edition, S. Chand & Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sidney, M., Young, J.F., and Darwin, D., Concrete, 2 nd Edition, Prentice-Hall, Pearson
Education, Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Kosmatka, S.H., Kerkhoff, B., and Panarese, W.C., Design and Control of ConcreteMixtures, 14
th Edition, Portland Cement Association, Skokie, Illinois, USA, 2003.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/104/105104206/

109
 CE606210 – INTRODUCTION TO LEAN CONSTRUCTION (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge about the basics of lean construction.
• To impart knowledge about the lean principles.
• To impart knowledge about the core concepts of lean construction.
• To impart knowledge about the lean tools and techniques.
• To impart knowledge about the basics of lean implementation in the construction industry.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and overview of the construction project management -Review of Project Management
& Productivity Measurement Systems – Productivity in Construction– Daily Progress Report-The
state of the industry for its management practices –construction project phases - Essential features of
contemporary construction management techniques - The problems with current construction
management techniques– Current production planning.

UNIT 2 - LEAN MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to lean management – Toyota's management principle-Evolution of lean in the
construction industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in
construction - Target value design – Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in the
construction industry – Waste Elimination.
UNIT 3 - CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9
Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact – Traditional
construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction and workflow
reliability – Work structuring – Production control.
UNIT 4 - LEAN CONSTRUCTION TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9
Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull-based production –
Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly planning meeting- Daily
Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in time.
UNIT 5 - LEAN CONSTRUCTION IMPLEMENTATION 9
Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology – Lean in design -
Design Structure Matrix Location Based Management System-BIM (Building Information Modelling)
- IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) – Sustainability through lean construction approach

110
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the contemporary management techniques and the issues in the present scenario.
CO2: Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from the
manufacturing industry to the construction industry.
CO3: Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and techniques
and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4: Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5: Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 2 3 3 2 3 - 2 2 - 2 3 1
CO2 1 2 1 2 2 1 - - 1 1 - 1 2 2
CO3 2 1 1 1 1 2 - - 2 2 - 2 2 3
CO4 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 - - 2 2 1 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 - - 1 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability agenda,
CIRIA, 2013.
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way, Springer,
2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P., Implementing lean in
Construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and
techniques, 2002.
2. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site Implementation and Assessment
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/106/105106213/

111
VERTICALS 3
 CE606301 –WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To impart knowledge on Hydrological cycle and rainfall measurement methods
• To familiarize the students about the runoff and hydrograph analysis
• To acquaint about the methods of irrigation and crop requirement details.
• To illustrate the river training works
• To outline drought management and water resources management.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Hydrological Parameters: Hydrological cycle, Water balance concept, Climate and availability of
water, types and forms of precipitation, Variability in rainfall, Measurement & Data analysis of
precipitation, Evaporation and its measurement, Transpiration and its measurement, Measurement of
Evapotranspiration, Potential and actual evapotranspiration, Penman Monteith method. Infiltration
indices, Factors affecting infiltration, Horton’s equation and Green Ampt method.

UNIT 2 - SURFACE RUNOFF 9

Runoff: Drainage basin and watershed characteristics, Types of runoff, Surface, subsurface flow,
base flow. Hydrographic Analysis: Mass curve, Hyetograph, Hydrograph with types, assumptions,
rationale and limitations of unit hydrograph, Derivation of unit hydrograph and its conversions, S-
hydrograph and its uses, Snyder’s Hydrograph, Flow duration curve and its uses
UNIT 3 - IRRIGATION 9
Developments in India, Necessity & types advantages and disadvantages of irrigation, Function of
water in plant growth, Methods of irrigation, Water requirement of crops, Irrigation frequency,
Irrigation efficiencies, Principal crops & crop season, Crop rotation
UNIT 4 - REGULATION AND CONTROL OF CANAL SYSTEM 9
Purpose, types of canal regulation works and their functional aspects, River training: Objective &
need, Classification of rivers training works, Meandering, Methods of river training, River bank
protection Earth Dam: Classification, Causes of failure, Introduction to stability analysis. Gravity
Dam: Forces, Methods of analysis, Modes of failure and factor of safety stability analysis, Galleries.
UNIT 5 - DROUGHT MANAGEMENT AND WATER HARVESTING 9
Definition of drought, Causes and types of drought, measures for water conservation and
augmentation, drought contingency planning and execution. Water harvesting: rainwater collection,

112
small dams, runoff enhancement, runoff collection, ponds, tanks, rooftop model of rainwater
harvesting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Remember the basic concepts of rainfall occurrence and its data interpretation
CO2: Construct unit hydrograph and S-hydrograph, and compute peak flood flow and design
CO3: flood for hydraulic structures
CO4: The basic requirements of irrigation and various irrigation techniques, requirements of the
crops
CO5: Examine the various types of forces, suitable location and design of weirs, impounding

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
2 3 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 2 1 2 3 2
CO2
3 2 3 2 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3
1 2 3 2 - 1 2 - 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO4 -
2 2 3 - 3 1 - 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO5 -
3 3 3 - 1 3 1 2 1 2 2 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. P.N. Modi, Irrigation Water Resources and Water Power Engineering Standard BookHouse,
New Delhi, 1990.
2. Asawa, G.L. “Irrigation and Water Resources Engg.”, New Age International.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. LINSLEY, R.K. WATER RESOURCES ENGG., MC GRAW HILL
2. LARRY W, WATER RESOURCES ENGG., JOHN WILEY
WEB RESOURCES:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104103/

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105110/

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104029

113
 CE606302 – INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To acquire theoretical knowledge of industrial processes, operations, manufacturing.
• To illustrate waste characterization study
• To classify industrial waste
• To outline pollution prevention methods
• To summarize solid waste treatment methods

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION 9
Properties of Water, Polar & Non-polar Solvents, True Solutions, Emulsification, Colloidal
Suspensions, and Mixtures made stable by Chelating Agents. Management of Industrial Wastes: Solid,
Liquid and Gaseous waste, Management of Industrial Wastewater, Management of Solid Wastes from
Industries, and Management of Discharges to the Air.

UNIT 2 - WASTE CHARACTERIZATION 9

Waste Characterization Study, Wastes Audit, Characteristics of Industrial Wastewater,
Characteristics of Discharges to the Air, Characteristics of Solid Waste Streams from Industries.
UNIT 3 - POLLUTION FROM MAJOR INDUSTRIES 9
Textile Wastes; Dairy wastes; Slaughterhouse, Poultry and fish processing waste; Tannery Wastes;
Sugar Mill Wastes; Pulp and Paper Mill Waste; Fermentation Industry Waste; Engineering Industry
Waste; Petroleum and Petrochemical wastes; Fertilizer and Pesticides Industry waste; Wastes from
vegetable, food and allied industries, Rubber Waste
UNIT 4 - POLLUTION PREVENTION & METHODS 9
Pollution Prevention: General Approach, Source Reduction, Waste minimization, strength and
volume reduction, segregation, reuse, recycle, material conservation, recovery, Benefits of Pollution
Prevention.
Methods for Treating Wastewaters from Industry: Wastewater Treatment Mechanisms, Waste
Equalization, pH Control, Chemical Methods of Wastewater Treatment, Biological Methods of
Wastewater Treatment, Physical Methods of Wastewater Treatment
UNIT 5 - TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID WASTES FROM INDUSTRY 9
Landfilling, Incineration, Composting Industrial Wastes, Solidification and Stabilization of Industrial
Solid Wastes. Methods for Treating Air Discharges from Industry: Reduction at Source, Containment,

114
Treatment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Introduction to types of industrial waste, characterization and management.
CO2: Identify the the characteristics of various industrial wastes
CO3: Study of manufacturing processes and wastes generated in various industries. to plan
minimization of industrial wastes
CO4: Design facilities for the processing and reclamation of industrial waste water
CO5: Discovering the sources, characteristics and Treatment and Disposal of Solid Wastes.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
3 2 - - - 2 1 - 2 1 2 1 2 2
CO2
3 2 - - - 2 1 - 2 - 2 2 1 2
CO3
3 3 - - - 1 1 - 2 - - 2 2 2
CO4 -
3 3 - - 2 1 - 3 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 -
3 2 - - 2 1 - 2 1 2 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Eckenfelder W.W. Jr., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw Hill Book Company,
NewDelhi, 2000.Handbook on Functional Requirements of Buildings Part 1 to 4 SP : 41 ( S
and T) 1995
2. Patwardhan.A.D., “Industrial Wastewater Treatment”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Nemerow NL () Industrial Waste Treatment: Contemporary Practice and Vision for the
Future, Butterworth-Heinemann
2. Frank Woodard (2001) Industrial Waste Treatment Handbook, Butterworth–Heinemann,
ISBN 0-7506-7317-6

3. WEF Manual of Practice No. FD-3, Industrial Wastewater Management, Treatment,And

Disposal, Water Environment Federation, Third Edition, McGraw Hill

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105048
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105160

115
 CE606303 - ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the principles and application of different instruments.
• To gain knowledge of various types of machinery and equipment used in environmental
control.
• Learn about various air pollution control technologies and strategies.
• Learn about various water pollution control technologies and strategies.
• To evaluate the effectiveness of pollution control measures in achieving environmental
sustainability and social equity.

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION 9
Necessity of Instrumentation & Control for environment, sensor requirement for environment-
Study of machinery, electric motors types and characteristics, other prime covers, pumps, capacity,
operation and maintenance of pumping machinery, air compressors preventive maintenance, break
down maintenance, schedules – Factors to be considered in the selection of the equipment.

UNIT 2 - INSTRUMENTATION 9
pH meter – Flame Emission Spectrometry. Absorption spectrometry – Nephelometry – Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry – Gas chromatography – working principle and components. Total carbon
analyzer – Mercury Analyzer polar graph for metal estimation and organic compounds – Ion selective
Electrode -SO2 and CO analyser – Instrument components and its working principle
UNIT 3 - AIR POLLUTION 9
Impact of man of the environment: An overview, Air pollution sources and effects, Metrological
aspect of air pollutant dispersion, Air pollution sampling and measurement, Air pollution control
methods and equipment, Air sampling techniques, soil pollution and its effects, Gas analyzer, Gas
chromatography, Control of specific gaseous pollutants, Measurement of automobile pollution,
Smoke level meter, CO/HC
UNIT 4 - WATER POLLUTION 9
Sources And classification of water pollution, Waste water sampling and analysis, marine pollution,
Waste water sampling techniques and analyzers, Gravimetric, Volumetric, Calometric,
Potentiometer, Flame photometry, Atomic absorption spectroscopy, Ion chromatography,
Instruments used in waste water treatment and control, Solid waste management techniques.

116
UNIT 5 – POLLUTION MANAGEMENT 9
Management of radioactive pollutants, Noise level measurement techniques, Instrumentation for
environmental pollution, Monitoring and audit, Instrumentation setup for pollution abatement. Noise
pollution and its effects, social and political involvement in the pollution management system
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the various instruments and equipment used in measurement
CO2: Describe the operation of a range of sensors and transducers with particular reference to
monitoring of water and air quality
CO3: Perform air pollution sampling and measurement, air pollution control methods and
equipment, air sampling techniques
CO4: Justify the use of an analytical instrument in monitoring and maintaining thequality of water
and air for solving real world environmental problem.
CO5: Summarize the pollution management system

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
2 3 2 - - 2 2 - 1 2 1 2 3 2
CO2
3 2 3 - - 2 2 - 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3
1 2 3 - - 1 2 - 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO4 -
2 2 3 - 3 1 - 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO5 -
3 3 3 - 1 3 - 2 1 2 2 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Instrumental Methods of Analysis by Willard, Merritt, Dean and Settle, 7th Edition, CBS
Publishers and Distributors, India,1988.
2. Bhatia, H.S., A Text Book in Environmental Pollution and control, Galgotia Publication(1998).
3. Trivedy R. K. &Goel P.K., Chemical and Biological methods for water pollutionstudies,
Environmental publication, Karat, 1986.
4. Cox C.R., Operation and Control of Water Treatment Processes, World HealthOrganisation,
Geneva, 1964.

117
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dhameja, S.K., Environmental Engineering and Management, S.K Kataria (2000).
2. Rao, M.N. and Rao, H.V., Air Pollution, Tata McGraw Hill (2004).
3. Rao. C.S., Environmental Pollution Control, New Age International (P) Limited,Publishers
(2006) 2nd ed.

WEB RESOURCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/video.php
2. http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/105102089/9

118
 CE606304 - AIR POLLUTION & CONTROL
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Introduction to Air Pollution and its effects, Sampling and measurement.
• Study the Property of Atmosphere, Metrological Variables and plume behaviour.
• To develop an understanding of the pollution control methods of particulate matter.
• Gaseous pollution control methods and Automobile pollutions.
• To give the concept Air population legislation in India and current topics.

UNIT 1 – SOURCES AND CLASSIFICATION 9

Sources and classification of Air Pollution Effects of Air Pollution on Human health, plants, Animals
and Property. Sampling and measurement in ambient, Work Place and stack.

UNIT 2 - METEOROLOGY 9
Meteorology- Concept of Atmosphere, wind movements, Windrose Diagram and Measurement of
Meteorological Variables. Atmospheric lapse rates, Adiabatic lapse rate and their consequences,
Plume behavior. Plume rise-equation, estimation of stack height.
UNIT 3 - POLLUTION CONTROL METHOD 9
Pollution control Method of a Particulate matter: Types of Particulate control methods - Settling
chambers, cyclone separators, scrubbers, filters and Electrostatic precipitators- Mechanism, Their
design and application.
UNIT 4 - GASEOUS POLLUTION CONTROL METHOD 9
Gaseous Pollution control method and Automobile Pollution: Types of gaseous Pollution Control
method- absorption, adsorption and combustion process. Automobile pollution- Sources of pollution,
composition of auto exhaust & control method.
UNIT 5 - AIR POLLUTION LEGISLATION AND GLOBAL PROBLEM 9
Air Pollution Legislation and Global Problem: Air Quality Standard, Ambient Air Quality Standard
and Emission standard. Air Pollution, legislation and regulation in India. Air Pollution Indices. Global
problem of air pollution and its remedial measure. Air Pollution from major Industrial Operations-
Case study
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

119
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Learned about Air Pollution, its effects and measurement.
CO2: Understanding of the Metrological concept and Plume behaviour
CO3: Understanding of control of particulate Matter by Different Methods.
CO4: Learned about Control of Gaseous Pollutants and automobile Pollution.
CO5: Awareness of Air Pollution Legislation in India and current topic

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 - - - 1 2 - 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO2 3 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 - - - 2 2 - 2 - 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 - - - 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Air Pollution M.N. RAO and H.V. RAO, M C Graw Hill Education.
2. Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science: - G. M. Masters
3. Environmental Pollution and Control – C.S. Rao
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Cooper, C.D., Alley, F.C. Air pollution control: A design approach, 2. baskı, Waveland
Press, Inc., ABD.
2. Theodore, L. Air pollution control equipment calculations, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., ABD.
3. Spellman, F. R., Whiting, N. E., (2004). Environmental engineer's mathematics handbook
by crc press.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_ce14/preview
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/104/105104099/

120
 CE606305 - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To expose the students to the need, methodology, documentation and usefulness of
environmental impact assessment.
• To minimize adverse effects and promote environmental sustainability.
• To develop the skill to prepare environmental management plan.
• To provide knowledge related to the broad field of environmental risk assessment.
• To predict and manage the human health risks.

UNIT 1 – INTRODUCTION 8
Historical development of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). EIA in Project Cycle. Legal and
Regulatory aspects in India. – Types and limitations of EIA –.EIA process- screening – scoping - setting
– analysis – mitigation. Cross sectoral issues and terms of reference in EIA – Public Participation in EIA
EIA Consultant Accreditation.

UNIT 2 - IMPACT INDENTIFICATION AND PREDICTION 10

Matrices – Networks – Checklists –Cost benefit analysis – Analysis of alternatives – Software packages
for EIA – Expert systems in EIA. Prediction tools for EIA – Mathematical modeling for impact
prediction – Assessment of impacts – air – water – soil – noise – biological - Cumulative Impact
Assessment
UNIT 3 - SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND EIA DOCUMENTATION 8
Social impact assessment - Relationship between social impacts and change in community and
institutional arrangements. Individual and family level impacts. Communities in transition
Documentation of EIA findings – planning – organization of information and visual display materials.
UNIT 4 - ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 7
EIA Report preparation. Environmental Management Plan - preparation, implementation and review –
Mitigation and Rehabilitation Plans – Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes –
Post project audit – Ethical and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment- Case Studies
UNIT 5 - ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT 12
Environmental risk assessment framework-Hazard identification -Dose Response Evaluation – Exposure
Assessment – Exposure Factors, Tools for Environmental Risk Assessment– HAZOP and FEMA
methods – Event tree and fault tree analysis – Multimedia and multipath way exposure modeling of

121
contaminant- Risk Characterization Risk communication - Emergency Preparedness Plans –Design of
risk management programs
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Identify and analyse the international sustainable development initiatives and reports
CO2: Understand the features Impact Identification and Prediction
CO3: Understand the process of Social impact assessment and EIA documentation
CO4: Analyse and document environmental projects and prepare management plan
CO5: Know about the legal requirements of Environmental and Risk Assessment for projects

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO2 2 3 - - - 1 3 - 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 3 - - - 2 3 - 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 - - - 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 3 - - - 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anjaneyulu. Y and Manickam. V., Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies, B.S.
Publications, Hyderabad, 2007
2. Barthwal, R. R., Environmental Impact Assessment, New Age International Publishers, 2002

3. Environmental Impact Assessment: Larry Canter. McGraw Hill Publication.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Disaster Management- Edited by R. B. Singh. Rawat Publications. India.
2. Environmental Impact Assessment- A. K. Shrivastava. APH Pub. India.
3. ISBN: 9780128111390, Butterworth-Heinemann.
4. Environmental Audit: A.K.Shrivastava. APH pub Corp. New Delhi.
5. ISO 14000: Environmental Management 1st Edition, David L. Goetsch , Stanley
6. Davis. ISBN-13: 978-0130812360. Jenson Books In
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ar07/preview
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ag10/preview

122
 CE606306 - ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY AND LEGISLATIONS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Introduction to environmental policies, evolution of environmental legislation in India,
environmental standards etc.
• To assess the effectiveness of regulatory interventions in reducing pollution levels, improving
environmental quality, and safeguarding public health and the ecosystem.
• Learn about international standards and best practices in environmental regulation and how
they influence domestic standards.
• To prevent or minimize exposures and environmental contamination.
• Contribute to sustainable development efforts in accordance with the latest rules and
notifications.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 8
Environmental Policies; National and International trends, Changes in global perspective,
International treaties. National Policies: National Environmental Policy, National Forest Policy,
National Water Policy, Rehabilitation and Resettlement Policy, CSR policy

UNIT 2 - WATER & AIR ( PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF POLLUTION) ACT 10

Water (Prevention and control of pollution) act 1974 as amended unto 1988, Water (Prevention and
control of pollution) rules 1975 , Water (Prevention and control of pollution) (Procedures for
Transaction of Business) rules 1975., Water (Prevention and control of pollution) cess Act, 1977 as
amended by amendment act, 1991, Water (Prevention and control of pollution ) cess rules, 1978 Air
(PrevenEvolution of environmental legislation in India, Legal provisions for environmental
protection; various Acts, Rules and Regulations. Notifications issued under various Acts and Rulestion
and control of pollution) act, 1981 as amended by amendment act, 1987, Air (Prevention and control
of Pollution) rules, 1982.
UNIT 3 - ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS; CRITERIA FOR STANDARDS
9
SETTING
Environment (Protection) act, 1986, Environment (Protection) rules, 1986, Hazardous wastes
(Management and Handling) rules, 1989, Basel convention, Manufacture, storage and import of
hazardous chemical rules, 1989. Scheme of labeling of environment friendly products (ECO – Marks).
UNIT 4 - HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ACTIVITIES 8

123
Legal framework: EPA and rules made thereunder; Public liability insurance act, 1991, Public
Liability insurance rules, 1991, Municipal solid waste act/ rule 2000, Biomedical waste act/ rule-2004.
UNIT 5 - RECENT RULES AND NOTIFICATIONS 9
National Green tribunals – recent environmental rules and notifications - e-waste Management
construction and demolition waste management, etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Fundamental knowledge of environmental policy and legislation.
CO2: Knowledge of legal aspects relating to water and air act
CO3: Learn decision-making process for the development of environmental standards
CO4: Aim and objectives of the Public Liability Insurance Act providing immediate relief to the
persons affected by accident occurring
CO5: An insight into the Environmental Protection Act and the associated Rules knowledge on
the Institutional setup for Environmental management and pollution control.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 - - - - 1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 - - - - 1 3 2 - 1 3 2 1
CO3 2 2 - - - - 1 3 2 - 1 3 2 1
CO4 2 2 - - - - 1 2 2 - 1 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 - - - - 1 2 2 - 1 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Environmental legislation in india, ulla roiha, finpro, region asia
2. Environmental Law of India, S.K. Choudhuri, Oxford & IBH Publishers
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pollution control acts, rules and notifications issued thereunder, CPCB-India
2. Handbook of Environmental laws, Acts, Guidelines, Compliances & Standards Policy,Trivedy,
BS Publishers
3. Pollution Control Acts, rules and notifications issued by CPCB [Ministry of and
Environment and forest, Goverment of India], Paryavaran Bhawan, CGO Complex,
New Delhi-110003.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/129106002
2. https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec20_ge12/preview

124
 CE606307 - GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY AND MANAGEMENT (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To equip the students with capabilities required to explain groundwater occurrences, aquifer
classification and aquifer properties in the many different geological environments.
• Carrying out comprehensive hydrological flow systems analyses in groundwater systems.
Performing detailed groundwater balances, interpreting and working with the concepts of
groundwater recharge, storage, and discharge.
• Knowledge of the steady-state and transient groundwater flow processes and their physical
description
• Application of analytical solutions to solve the groundwater management problems
• To demonstrate and derive the basic equations used in Groundwater development and
management and the corresponding equations

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Ground water hydrologic cycle, origin of ground water, rock properties effecting ground water,
Vertical distribution of ground water, zone of aeration and zone of saturation, geologic formation as
aquifers, types of aquifers, porosity, specific yield and specific retention. Ground Water Movement-
Permeability, Darcy’s law, storage coefficient, Transmissivity, Differential equation governing
ground water flow in three dimensions derivation, ground water flow equation in polar coordinate
system, ground water flow contours and their applications.

UNIT 2 - ANALYSIS OF PUMPING TEST DATA-I 9

Steady flow ground water flow towards a well in confined and unconfined aquifers-Dupit’s and
Theism’s equations, assumptions, formation constants, yield of an open well interface and well tests.
UNIT 3 - ANALYSIS OF PUMPING TEST DATA-II 9
Unsteady flow towards well-non-equilibrium equations, thesis solution, jocob and chow’s
simplifications, leak aquifers
UNIT 4 - SURFACE AND SUB-SURFACE INVESTIGATION 9
surface methods of exploration-Electrical resistivity method and Seismic refraction methods.
Subsurface methods geophysical logging and resistivity logging. Concept of artificial recharge of
ground water, recharge methods, Applications of GIS and RS in artificial recharge of ground water
along with case studies.

125
UNIT 5 - GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY & MANAGEMENT 9
Saline water intrusion in aquifer Occurrence of saline water intrusion, Ghyben-Herzberg relation,
Shape of interface, control of water intrusion. Ground water basin management- Case studies of
Groundwater in India Management of Groundwater: concepts of basin management, conjunctive use,
mathematical modelling, artificial groundwater recharge: concepts, recharge methods, recharge
mounds, induced recharge. Saline water intrusion in aquifers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand aquifer properties and its dynamics groundwater occurrences, aquifer
classification
CO2: Identify different fundamental equations and concepts as applied in the Groundwater studies
CO3: Discuss and derive differential equation governing groundwater flow in three dimensions
CO4: To solve groundwater mathematical equations and analyze pumping tests in steady and non-
steady flow cases
CO5: Distinguish and understand the saline water intrusion problem in costal aquifers

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 2 2 3 1 1 - 1 2 1 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 2 3 1 1 - 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO3 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 - 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 - 2 3 1 - 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 - 2 1 2 2 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Todd D.K., Mays L.W. , Groundwater Hydrology, Wiley, (2004).

2. Raghunath H.M., Ground Water , New Age International Publishers, (2007)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Schwarz F., Zhang H., Fundamentals of Ground Water, Wiley, (2002).
2. Fitts C., Groundwater Science, Academic Press, (2012).
3. Bear J., Hydraulics of Groundwater, Dover Publications, (2007)
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/101/105101214/
2. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/105105042/L01.html

126
 CE606308- SURFACE WATER HYDROLOGY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the relevance of various components of hydrologic cycles.
• To assess the variability and trends in precipitation patterns over time and space.
• To analyze and interpret environmental data, make informed decisions, and develop
innovative solutions to environmental problems.
• Importance of streamflow measurement in various applications.
• To design and implement water conservation strategies.
UNIT 1 - HYDROMETEOROLOGY 9
Hydrologic cycle – Global water budget – Practical applications – Hydrometeorology – Constituents
of atmosphere – Vertical structure of the atmosphere – general circulation – Transitory system – Air
mass – Air front – cyclones – Formation of precipitation – Types and forms of precipitation – Climate
and Weather – Meteorological Observations.

UNIT 2 - PRECIPITATION 9
Measurement of rainfall – Rain gauges – Radar Measurement of rainfall - Rainfall Hyetograph –
Intensity Duration and Frequency analysis – Consistency – Missing data – Rain gauge network –
Average depth of rainfall analysis – Spatial analysis using GIS – Annual rainfall of India and
Tamilnadu
UNIT 3 - ABSTRACTIONS 9
Water losses - Initial losses – Interception and depression storage – Evaporation – Evaporimeters –
Estimation of Evaporation - Evapotranspiration – Field Measurement – Empirical Equations -
Infiltration – Infiltrometers – Infiltration Equations - Infiltrate
UNIT 4 - STREAMFLOW MEASUREMENT 9
Stage and Velocity Measurement – Gauges – Current meter and Doppler flow velocity meter -
Discharge measurement – Area Velocity method - Area Slope method – Discharge Measuring
Structures - Dilution Technique – Stage Discharge relationship – Selection of a Stream Gauging Site.
UNIT 5 - RUNOFF AND WATER CONSERVATION 9
Concept of catchment – Linear, Areal and Relief Aspects – Detailed study of Runoff process – Factors
affecting Runoff – Hydrograph – Unit Hydrograph – Synthetic Hydrograph –Runoff estimation -
Strange and SCS methods – Water Conservation – Rain water and Runoff Harvesting in Rural and

127
Urban Areas - Reservoir Sedimentation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Knowledge on hydrologic cycle, hydrometeorology and formation ofprecipitation
CO2: Apply the various methods of field measurements and empirical formulas for estimating the
various losses of precipitation, stream flow andrunoff
CO3: Describe the various process, measurement and estimation of hydrological components:
evaporation, infiltration, stream flow etc.
CO4: Apply hydrological models to real-world problems
CO5: Know the various methods of rainwater and runoff harvesting. Then apply the knowledge
of soil erosion and sedimentation to estimate the life of the reservoir

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 - - - 1 1 - - 1 - 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 - - - 1 1 - - 1 - 2 2 3
CO3 1 2 2 - - 1 2 - - 1 - 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 - - 3 1 - - 1 - 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 - - - 1 3 - - 1 - 2 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Chow V T, Maidment D R and Mays L W, Applied hydrology, McGraw Hill (1988).
2. McCuen R H, , Hydrologic Analysis and Design, Pearson (2012)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chow V.T., Maidment D.R., Mays L.W., Applied Hydrology, McGraw Hill
Publications, New York, 1995.
2. Subramanya K., Hydrology,Tata McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi, 1994.
3. Patra.K.C, Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering, Narosa Publications, 2008, Second
Edition, New Delhi.
4. Jeya Rami Reddy.P, Hydrology, Laximi Publications, New Delhi, 2004.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22ce37/preview

128
 CE606309 - COMPUTATIONAL HYDRAULICS (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Introduce the computational aspects of hydraulics in the context of Civil Engineering
problems groundwater flow, open channel flow, flow in closed conduits.
• It combines classical hydraulics with new methods such as finite elements and boundary
elements.
• Development and application of mathematical models in the area of 1D open-channel flow.
• Analyzing flow characteristics, including velocity, discharge, depth, and channel
morphology, using mathematical models and hydraulic principles.
• To apply principles of flow in pressurized conduits and interaction hydraulics to solve
practical engineering problems.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTATIONAL HYDRAULICS 9

Introduction to Computational Hydraulics: Problem Definition and Governing Equations,
Classification of Problems based on Initial Condition (IC) and/or Boundary Condition (BC),
Classification of Differential Equations

UNIT 2 - NUMERICAL METHODS 9

Numerical Methods: Finite Difference Method, Finite Volume Method, Mesh-Free Method,
Discretization of IVP, BVP, IBVP, Numerical Stability, Convergence Solution of Algebraic Equation
(Linear and Nonlinear solvers).
UNIT 3 - GROUND WATER HYDRAULICS 9
One-Dimensional Flow, Steady Two-Dimensional Flow , Groundwater Flow , Pipe Flow, 1D Open
Channel Flow: GVF, SVF, RVF, Network
UNIT 4 - SURFACEWATER HYDRAULICS 9
Unsteady Two-Dimensional Flow using Finite Difference Method, Steady Channel Flow : Channel
Network without reverse Flow, Unsteady Flow in Pipes, surface Water and Ground Water
Interaction,2D Surface Water Flow: SWE
UNIT 5 - FLOW IN PRESSURZIED CONDUIT & INTERACTION HYDRAULICS 9
Interaction Hydraulics: Groundwater Flow, Surface Flow, Pipe Flow, Channel Flow
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

129
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the significance of basic principles of Computational Hydraulics
CO2: Computation of Numerical Methods & Finite Element Method
CO3: Apply The Principles Surface water Hydraulics
CO4: Development and application of mathematical models in the area of 1D open-channel flow
CO5: Understand The Working Principle Of Flow In Pressurized Conduit & Interaction
Hydraulics

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - - 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
CO5 2 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Computational Modeling in Hydraulic and Coastal Engineering” by C. G.
Koutitas and P. D. Scarlatos, CRC Press.
2. Computational Fluid Dynamics” by Tapan Sengupta, Universities Press
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Computational River Dynamics” by Weiming Wu, Taylor and Francis.
2. An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Finite Volume Method” by H.
Versteeg, PEARSON.
3. Mesh Free Methods: Moving Beyond the Finite Element Method” by G. R. Liu, CRC Press
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105108125
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc17/SEM2/noc17-ce07/

130
 CE606310 - RURAL WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To analyze hydrological data and models to assess water availability in different regions.
• To analyze groundwater flow patterns, and develop sustainable groundwater management
strategies.
• To apply surface water hydrology principles to solve practical problems.
• Importance of integrating water management with other rural development initiatives.
• To develop holistic solutions to rural water management issues.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Importance of water resource management, & Hydrological Cycle and representations, Key
Hydrological Parameters, analysis of hydrological water availability in India, projected water demand
different use.

UNIT 2 - INTRODUCTION TO GROUNDWATER HYDROLOGY 9

Groundwater components-precipitation ,evaporation ,runoff/ discharge, water storage ,soil moisture,-
precipitation importance, types, formation ,measurement, ground water assessment, GW data issues,
GW model, changes in ground water flow ,base flow hydrograph, ground water recharge
UNIT 3 - SURFACE WATER HYDROLOGY 9
Need of surface water storage structure –constructional aspects of rural lake tank – uses of lake at
ecosystem services-lift irrigation from a check dam- types of surface water irrigation-community
management of irrigation-issues of rural/urban conversion of lake –,Water Mass Balance Equation
UNIT 4 - RURAL WATER MANAGEMENT 9
Issues, Data Challenges And Observation-Rural Water Management Water Secruity, Water
Conservation Under Mg ,Lake of Ownership By Agencies-Public Participatory By NGOs-
Convergence Of Funds- Rural Water Resource Management Infrastructure (Engineered), Rural Water
Resource Management Infrastructure (Nature Based)
UNIT 5 - CASE STUDIES 9
Solving Case Studies In Rural Water Resource Management stage agencies - Rural hydrological
databases for India, Remote Sensing data bases for Rural water resources
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

131
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: The complete knowledge on hydrologic cycle and hydro meteorological measurements
CO2: Knowledge of the various methods of field measurements and estimation of precipitation,
abstraction and runoff process which they apply to carry out the assessment of water balance
and runoff potential
CO3: Apply their knowledge on surface water hydrology
CO4: Apply the knowledge of overall concepts of Rural Water Management
CO5: Potential of remote sensing and GIS is solving problems in water resources through case
studies.
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 - - - 2 2 - - - - 2 1 2
CO2 2 3 - - - 2 3 - - - 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 - - - 2 3 - - - 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 - - - 2 3 - - 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 - 1 2 2 1 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dingman, S.L. and Dingman, S.L. 2015. Physical hydrology (Vol. 575). Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Prentice Hall.
2. Viessman, W., Lewis, G.L. and Knapp, J.W. 2003. Introduction to hydrology (No. GB 661.2.
V53 1972.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Patra.K.C, Hydrology and Water Resources Engineering, Narosa Publications, 2008, 2nd
Edition, New Delhi
2. Field notes from instructor 8) Raghunath H.M. 2006. Hydrology: principles, analysis and
design
3. Brady, Nyle C., and Harry Oliver Buckman. The nature and properties of soils. No. 631.4
B7295n Ej. 6 008553. Macmillan, 2013.
4. Jeya Rami Reddy.P, Hydrology, Laximi Publications, New Delhi, 2004.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/105101215/L41.html

132
VERTICALS 4
 CE606401 – HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEYING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide the necessary knowledge and practical instrument operational and data processing
skills.
• To analyze, interpret, and utilize depth data and acoustic signals effectively.
• To understand the factors influencing navigation accuracy and reliability.
• To solve practical problems in navigation, mapping, surveying, and spatial analysis.
• To explore case studies highlighting the diverse roles of hydrographic surveyors in different
marine projects.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION, TIDES AND DATUMS 9

Overview of hydrographic surveying concepts- bathymetric and nautical charts- Basic tidal theory
tidal observations and predictions - common types of recording tide gauges -different vertical datums
- Indian tides.

UNIT 2 - SOUNDINGS 9
Overview of depth data types- Working principle of echo sounders - characteristics and nature of
underwater acoustic signals – transducers - error sources and calibrations- Advanced instrumentation.
UNIT 3 - NAVIGATION AND POSITION FIXING 9
Horizontal positioning methods and requirements - concept of line and surface of position -
positioning and navigation using satellite positioning systems - differential GPS and Real- time
kinematic (RTK)
UNIT 4 - PLANNING AND DATA PROCESSING 9
General considerations for planning of an inshore hydrographic survey - ground and track control -
practical soundings in inshore and coastal surveys - data processing and chart compilation -
hydrographic software packages for data collection - processing and plotting.
UNIT 5 - MARINE ENVIRONMENTAL MEASUREMENTS 9
Methods of measuring and recording of currents - composition of the sea bed - and solids in suspension
- Case Studies (The role of the hydrographic surveyor on different marine projects)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

133
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Learn the fundamentals of hydrographic surveying.
CO2: Identify the appropriate techniques for different types of survey.
CO3: Understand the various options available during the Navigation
CO4: Analyze the data collected from a survey and assess its quality against the project
requirements
CO5: Discuss the different roles for a hydrographic surveyor on marine projects

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - 1 - - - - - 2 2 2 3 1 1
CO2 3 - 1 - - 3 - - 1 1 - 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 - 3 - - 1 2 - 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 - 2 - 2 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, (2002), Hydrographic Surveying, Document No. EM
1110-2-1003.
2. Ingham, A. E. (1992), Hydrography for the Surveyor and Engineer, 3rd Edition revisedby
Abbott V. J., Blackwell Science.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. de Jong, C. D., Lachapelle, G., Skone, S. & Elema, I. A. (2002), Hydrography, Delft
University Press, The Netherlands.
2. Loweth, R. P. (1997), Manual of Offshore Surveying for Geoscientists and Engineers
Chapman & Hall.
3. Pugh, D. (2004), Changing Sea Levels – Effects of Tides, Weather and Climate,
Cambridge University Press.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://oceanservice.noaa.gov/podcast/

134
 CE606402 – GEOINFORMATICS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the information concepts and systems used in Geoinformatics.
• To familiarize the role of Internet and Networks in Geoinformatics.
• To familiarize web data services and geoinformation.
• Understanding of the principles, methods, and technologies involved in accessing,
processing, and utilizing data.
• To communicate geospatial information effectively through maps, charts, and other
visualization tools.

UNIT 1 – COMPUTER SYSTEMS 9

C Computers - types - components - CPU - memory - Input devices-Output device- Operating
Systems: Windows, Linux–fundamentals - software - system software, application software - file
operations.

UNIT 2 - DATA ACQUISITION 9

Acquisition and storage of Numeric data- Textual data - image data - Audio data - Animation and
Video data - Data formats - fundamentals of image and video compression - introduction to geospatial
data- remote sensing sensors, data organization
UNIT 3 - NETWORKS AND COMMUNICATION 9
Fundamental computer network concepts - Network layers - TCP/IP model - LAN, WAN, WLAN,
intranet, Internet - Applications - Essentials of internet - Ethernet - Network Routing - Switching -
Data transportation through Network - protocols - Cell phone working fundamentals - Cell phone
frequencies & channels - Digital cell phone components - Cell phone network technologies /
architecture.
UNIT 4 - WEB DATA AND SERVICES 9
Browser fundamentals - Client - Server - Architecture - web site essentials - Web development -
Platforms - Tools - Languages - HTML PHP - client side scripting - javascript - database - Postgresql
- MySQL - Web server - Application Server – Data server - Data services - Big data - cloud storage
UNIT 5 - GEOINFORMATION 9
Information System - GIS - GPS - Information retrieval system - Geo-database - interactive
applications - Multimedia applications - Earth resource platform – Google maps and Google earth -

135
LBS - Introduction to Integration of Geo-database and Social networking applications
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply Computer systems and data formats
CO2: Apply basics of Geoinformation
CO3: Create the role of network systems that handles Geoinformation.
CO4: Apply data and technologies related to Geoinformation .
CO5: Apply data and technologies related to GPS & GIS techniques.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 - 1 1 1 - 2 2 1 - 3 2 2
CO3 3 1 - 2 2 1 - 2 - 1 - 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 3 1 1 - 1 - 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 1 1 - 1 1 3 2 1 1 - 3 2 3
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robin Nixon, "Learning PHP, MySQL, JavaScript, CSS & HTML5" Third Edition, O'Reilly,
2014.
2. James F. Kurose, “Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach” Sixth Edition, Pearson,
2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao, "Mobile Cellular Communication", Pearson, 2012.
2. Peter Norton, “Introduction to Computers” Sixth edition, Tata McGraw – Hill, 2008.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://gisresources.com/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105108073

136
 CE606403 - SATELLITE IMAGE PROCESSING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To solve real-world problems, and contribute to advancements in fields such as remote
sensing.
• To understand the importance of preprocessing techniques in enhancing the quality and
usability of sensor data.
• To evaluate the effectiveness of enhancement techniques using quantitative metrics and
qualitative assessments.
• To categorize images based on their visual content and features.
• To apply advanced classifier techniques to solve complex classification problems in various
domains.

UNIT 1 – FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING 9

Introduction - Information Systems - Encoding and decoding - acquisition, storage and retrieval – data
products -satellite data formats - Digital Image Processing Systems - Hardware and software design
consideration Scanner, digitizer - photo write systems-Fundamental concepts of Map Info and
ARCGIS Software - Function of a satellite - Satellite Component - Various band used in satellite.

UNIT 2 - SENSORS MODEL AND PRE PROCESSING 9

Image Fundamentals – Sensor models – spectral response – Spatial response – IFOV,GIFOV& GSI –
Simplified Sensor Models – Sampling & quantization concepts – Image Representation& geometry
and Radiometry – Colour concepts – Sources of Image degradation and Correction procedures-
Atmospheric, Radiometric, Geometric Corrections Image Geometry Restoration-interpolation
methods and resampling techniques.
UNIT 3 - IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Image Characteristics - Histograms - Scattergrams – Univariate and multi variate statistics
enhancement in spatial domain – global, local & colour Transformations – PC analysis, edge
detections, merging - filters - convolution – LPF, HPF , HBF, directional box, cascade –
Morphological and adaptive filters – Zero crossing filters – scale space transforms – power spectrum
– texture analysis – frequency transformations - Fourier, wavelet and curvelet transformations.
UNIT 4 - IMAGE CLASSIFICATION 9
Spectral discrimination - pattern recognition concepts - Baye‘s approach - Signature and training sets

137
– Separability test –Supervised Classification – Minimum distance to mean, Parallelepiped, MLC –
Unsupervised classifiers – ISODATA,K-means-Support Vector Machine – Segmentation (Spatial,
Spectral) – Tree classifiers - Accuracy assessment – Error matrix – Kappa statistics – ERGAS, RMS.
UNIT 5 - ADVANCED CLASSIFIERS 9
Fuzzy set classification – sub- pixel classifier – hybrid classifiers, Texture based classification –
Object based classifiers – Artificial Neural nets – Hebbian leaning – Expert system, types and
examples – Knowledge systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand about Remote sensing and Image processing systems
CO2: Acquire knowledge about the source of error in satellite image and also to remove the error
from satellite image.
CO3: Select appropriate image Enhancement techniques based on image characteristics
CO4: Classify the satellite image using various methods and also evaluate the accuracy of
classification.
CO5: Apply the advanced image classification methods and conduct lifelong research in the field
of image processing.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 - - 1 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 - 1 1 2 3 - - 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 - 1 1 2 2 - - 1 1 2 2
CO4 2 - 1 - - 3 1 2 1 1 - 2 3 1
CO5 1 - 1 1 - 2 - 1 2 1 2 - 1 -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John, R. Jensen, Introductory Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 4th Edition,
2015.
2. Robert, A. Schowengergt, Techniques for Image Processing and classification in Remote
Sensing, Academic Press, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert, G. Reeves, - Manual of Remote Sensing Vol. I & II - American Society of
Photogrammetry, Falls, Church, USA, 1983.
2. Richards, Remote sensing digital Image Analysis - An Introduction 5th Edition , 2012,Springer
-Verlag 1993.

138
 3. Digital Image Processing by Rafael C. Gonzalez,Richard Eugene Woods- Pearson/Prentice
Hall,2008
4. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing by Annadurai Pearson Education (2006)
5. Digital Image Processing: PIKS Scientific Inside by William K. Pratt 4th Edition,Wiley
Interscience, 2007.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/satellite-image-processing/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ce38/preview

139
 CE606404 - CARTOGRAPHY
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce concepts of Cartography.
• To expose the process of map making and projections.
• Understanding the elements of a map, principles of map layout, and fundamentals of map
design.
• To understand the principles, techniques, and considerations involved in these aspects of
cartographic design and production.
• Utilizing spatial data models to analyze and solve spatial problems in GIS applications.

UNIT 1 – ELEMENTS OF CARTOGRAPHY 9

Definition of Cartography – Maps – Functions – Uses and Types of Maps – Map Scales and Contents
– Map Projections – Shape, Distance, Area and Direction Properties

UNIT 2 - MAP PROJECTION 9

Perspective and mathematical Projections – Indian Maps and Projections – Map Co-ordinate System
– UTM and UPS References
UNIT 3 - MAP DESIGN 9
Elements of a Map – Map Layout Principles – Map Design Fundamentals – Symbols and Conventional
Signs – Graded and Ungraded Symbols – Color Theory – Colours and Patterns in Symbolization
UNIT 4 - MAP PRODUCTION 9
Map Lettering – Map Production – Map Printing – Colours and Visualization – Map Reproduction –
Map Generalization – Geometric Transformations – Bilinear and Affine Transformations.
UNIT 5 - DATA QUALITY 9
Introduction to data quality – Types of data – Spatial, Attribute data – types of attributes – scales/levels
of measurements – spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster Data Compression – Vector
Data Structures – Raster Vs Vector Models – TIN and GRID data models.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

140
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Be familiar about the concept about the basics of cartography.
CO2: Be familiar the concepts of Map projection
CO3: Be familiar the concepts of Map Design
CO4: Create the concepts of Map Production and its utility.
CO5: Create the concepts of spatial data quality and data standard

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 2 1 - - 2 2 - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 - - 1 1 2
CO3 3 1 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 1 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO5 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arthur H. Robinson et al, “Elements of Cartography”, 7th Edition, Wiley, 2002.
2. Kang – Tsung Chang, "Introduction to Geographic Information Systems", McGraw Hill
Publishing, Fourth Edition, 2017.
3. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction to
Geographical Information Systems, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Campbell, "Introductory Cartography", Wm. C.BrownPublishers,3rd Edition,2004
2. Chor Pang LO, Albert K. W. Yeung, “Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, November 2016. ISBN: 9789332581883
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://alg.manifoldapp.org/read/introduction-to-cartography/section/31abbc19-43ec-4795-
9b08- 4d735d4b7e4b
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/102/105102015/

141
 CE606405 – CADASTRAL SURVEYING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the concepts of cadastral surveying and its features, importance and applications.
• To know the advancements in surveying.
• Understanding of the principles, concepts, and measurements associated with aerial
photography.
• To utilize photogrammetric products and outputs for decision-making, planning, and
engineering applications.
• To understand the role of satellite imagery in enhancing boundary fixing and cadastral surveying
processes.

UNIT 1 – CADASTRAL SURVEY METHOD 9

Steps in survey of a village – Instruments used for cadastral survey and mapping – Orthogonal, Polar
survey methods – Boundary survey – Rectangulation – Calculation of area of Land- GPS and Total
Station in Cadastral survey.

UNIT 2 - PRINCIPLES AND PROPERTIES OF PHOTOGRAPHY 9

History - Definition, Applications – Types of Photographs, Classification – Photographic overlaps –
Camera: metric vs. non-metric, Digital Aerial cameras – Multiple frame and Line cameras – Linear
array scanner – Flight Planning – Crab & Drift– Computation of flight plan - Photogrammetric project
Planning.
UNIT 3 - GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES OF AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS 9
Photo coordinate measurement – Vertical photographs -geometry, scale, Coordinate system, Relief
displacement – Stereoscopes – Stereoscopic parallax – parallax equations -Geometry, Scale, Coordinate
system – Relief displacement –- Photo Interpretation.
UNIT 4 - PHOTOGRAMMETRIC METHODS 9
Photogrammetry for cadastral surveying and mapping – Orthophoto map – Quality control measures –
Organisation of cadastral offices – international scenario.
UNIT 5 - MAINTENANCE AND MEASUREMENTS 9
Cadastral survey maintenance – Resurveys – Measurement of sub-division – Measurement of obstructed
lines – Survey of urban areas – Control requirement for Urban survey use of Satellite Imagery in

142
boundary fixing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Gain the knowledge about cadastral survey.
CO2: Understand the methods of cadastral survey.
CO3: Get the knowledge about photogrammetric methods.
CO4: Understand Land Record System and computational procedure for modernization of the
same.
CO5: The students will be in position to understand the Government procedure in Land Record
Management
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 2 2 3 - 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 1 2 2 2 - 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 3
CO4 1 1 2 1 - 2 - 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
CO5 2 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 2 2 1 1 1 1

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Paul. R Wolf., Bon A. DeWitt, Elements of Photogrammetry with Application in GIS McGraw
Hill International Book Co., 4th Edition, 2014
2. R.Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Karl Kraus, Photogrammetry: Geometry from Images and Laser Scans, Walter de Gruyter GmbH
and Co. 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. E. M. Mikhail, J. S. Bethel, J. C. McGlone, Introduction to Modern Photogrammetry, Wiley
Publisher, 2001.
3. James, M. Anderson and Edward N. Mikhail, Introduction to Surveying, McGraw Hill Book Co,
1985.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.land.vic.gov.au/surveying/cadastral-survey
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l85hzXUKGBs

143
 CE606406 – HIGHER SURVEYING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the techniques of time consuming for topographic mapping.
• To know about the fundamental concepts, data acquisition, data processing, and applications.
• To apply photogrammetry effectively in various fields, including mapping, remote sensing
and geospatial analysis.
• To understand the principles, methods, and applications of LiDAR and RADAR remote
sensing in geoscience and related fields.
• To understand the principles, methods, and technologies used in hydrographic surveying for
mapping and charting bodies of water.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Higher Surveying - Understanding reference system, reference frame, and coordinate
system for Earth- Coordinate and datum transformations -Projected coordinate system - Fundamentals
of astronomy- Applications of concepts of astronomy

UNIT 2 - ASTRONOMY AND TIME 9

Time - Application of concepts of astronomy and time - Fundamental concepts of error, accuracy, and
error propagation - Applications of error propagation - Observation Equation Method of adjustments
- Condition Equation Method and Combined Method of adjustments - Analysis of adjustments and
reporting of errors
UNIT 3 - PHOTOGRAMMETRY 9
Introduction to Photogrammetry - Vertical photogrammetry -Stereo photogrammetry – Analytical
photogrammetry-I - Analtical photogrammetry-II - Photogrammetric products – Image matching -
Close range photogrammetry
UNIT 4 - LIDAR AND RADAR 9
Fundamentals of LiDAR - LiDAR data acquisition - Geolocation and errors of LiDAR data -
Information extraction from LiDAR data - RADAR fundamenetals -I - RADAR fundamentals-II –
Radargrammetry - Imaging RADAR Interferometry - Geoscience perspective for RADAR
applications
UNIT 5 - HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY 9
Fundamental concepts of hydrographic survey -Field procedures for hydrographic Surveying - Modern

144
techniques for hydrographic Survey - Navigation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Justify the concept of higher surveying.
CO2: Justify the concept of Astronomy and time.
CO3: Know the concept of Photogrammetry.
CO4: Know the advanced concepts of LIDAR and RADAR
CO5: Know the concepts of hydrographic survey

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 3 2 - - 2 1 - 2 - 2 2 1 1
CO2 2 2 3 - - 1 1 - 1 - 1 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 - - 1 - 1 - 1 2 2 2
CO4 1 1 2 2 2 - 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Elements of Photogrammetry with Application in GIS, by Paul R Wolf, Bon A DeWitt, and
Benjamin E Wilkinson, 4th ed, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014.
2. Introduction to Modern Photogrammetry, by E M Mekhail, 1st ed, Wiley, 2001. Adjustment
Computations: Spatial Data Analysis, by Charles D Ghilani, 5th ed, Wiley, 2010.
3. Electronic Surveying in Practice, by S H Laurila, John Wiley & Sons, 1983.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Topographic Laser Ranging and Scanning – Principles and Processing, by J Shan and C K
Toth(editors), CRC Press, 2009.
2. Hydrographic Surveying - Methods, Tables and Forms of Notes, by S H Lea, and J Gloag,
Forgotten Books, 2017.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105103176

145
 CE606407 – GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the fundamental concepts about GIS its map projection data and concepts spatial
analysis, its importance and application.
• To implement the conceptual data of map and types of structure in different stratum.
• To understand the fundamentals of GIS and their applications in various domains.
• To develop skills in raster data input using scanners and various raster data file formats.
• To understand the principles, methods, and standards used to evaluate the quality of spatial
data in GIS.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Overview, History and concepts of GIS - Scope and application areas of GIS - Purpose and benefits
of GIS - Functional components of GIS - Importance of GPS and remote sensing data in GIS

UNIT 2 - MAP DESIGN AND PRODUCTION 9

Elements of a Map – Map Layout Principles – Map Design Fundamentals – Symbols and Conventional
Signs – Graded and Ungraded Symbols – Color Theory – Colours and Patterns inSymbolization –
Map Lettering – Map Production – Map Printing – Colours and Visualization –Map Reproduction –
Map Generalization – Geometric Transformations – Bilinear and Affine Transformations.
UNIT 3 - FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9
Introduction to GIS – Definitions – History of GIS – Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software,
Data, People, Methods – Introduction to data quality – Types of data – Spatial, Attribute data – types
of attributes – scales/levels of measurements – spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression – Vector Data Structures – Raster Vs Vector Models – TIN and GRID data models.
UNIT 4 - DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9
Scanner – Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing– Vector Data Input –
Digitizer– Datum Projection and Reprojection – Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,
Connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats – Attribute
Data Linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration – Raster to Vector and Vector to
Raster Conversion.
UNIT 5 - DATA QUALITY AND OUTPUT 9
Assessment of Data Quality - Basic Aspects - Completeness, Logical Consistency, Positional

146
Accuracy, Temporal Accuracy, Thematic Accuracy and Lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –
Interoperability – OGC - Spatial Data Infrastructure – Data Output – Map Compilation – Chart /
Graphs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Be familiar with appropriate map projection and co-ordinate system for production ofMaps
and shall able to compile and design maps for their required purpose.
CO2: Be familiar with co-ordinate and Datum transformations
CO3: Understand the basic concepts and components of GIS, the techniques used for storage of
spatial data and data compression
CO4: Understand the concepts of spatial data quality and data standard
CO5: Understand the concept of spatial data inputs

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 - 2 - 2 3 2 - - 3 1 1
CO2 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 -
CO3 3 1 2 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 -
CO4 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
CO5 1 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arthur H. Robinson et al, “Elements of Cartography”, 7th Edition, Wiley, 2002.
2. Kang – Tsung Chang, "Introduction to Geographic Information Systems", McGraw Hill
Publishing, Fourth Edition, 2017.
3. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction to
Geographical Information Systems, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2011.
4. R.Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Campbell, "Introductory Cartography", Wm. C.BrownPublishers,3rd Edition,2004
2. Chor Pang LO, Albert K. W. Yeung, “Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, November 2016. ISBN: 9789332581883
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107155

147
 CE606408 – MODERN SURVEYING TECHNIQUES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the concepts of modern survey its features, techniques, importance and applications.
• To understand the basic principles of satellite positioning.
• To apply aerial photography techniques effectively in various disciplines.
• To process remote sensing data using specialized software tools.
• To understand the data structures used in GIS.
UNIT 1 - MODERN SURVEYING EQUIPMENTS 9
Introduction – electronic distance measuring instrument – Electronic theodolite and total station – its
working principle and application.

UNIT 2 - GPS 9
Basic – Positioning using satellites – principles – GPS receivers – GPS Errors and Accuracy – Errors
sources- satellite geometry and accuracy measures – measurement techniques – navigational solutions
UNIT 3 - PHOTOGRAMMETRY 9
Introduction – Geometry of vertical and tilted photograph – stereoscopy and parallax – Flight planning
– development in photogrammetry.
UNIT 4 - REMOTE SENSING 9
Introduction – Physical basis of remote sensing – EMR, EMR interaction on atmosphere, ground
surface, Water & Snow, Soil, Radiometry. – Interpretation – image processing techniques – image
enhancement – information extraction.
UNIT 5 - GIS 9
Introduction – data structure for GIS – manipulation – analysis – modeling – errors – corrections.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Be familiar with the concept of modern surveying equipments.
CO2: Be familiar with the basic concepts about GPS.
CO3: Be familiar with the basic concepts about Photogrammetry.
CO4: Be familiar with the basic concepts about Remote Sensing.
CO5: Be familiar with the basic concepts about GIS.

148
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 3 - 1 - 1 1 - 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 1 - 1 1 2
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 - 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 2 - 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 -
CO5 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 3 1 2 2 - 1 -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arthur H. Robinson et al, “Elements of Cartography”, 7th Edition, Wiley, 2002.
2. Kang – Tsung Chang, "Introduction to Geographic Information Systems", McGraw Hill
Publishing, Fourth Edition, 2017.
3. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction to
Geographical Information Systems, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John Campbell, "Introductory Cartography", Wm. C.BrownPublishers,3rd Edition,2004
2. Chor Pang LO, Albert K. W. Yeung, “Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information
Systems”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, November 2016. ISBN: 9789332581883
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/104/105104100/

149
 CE606409 – GPS SURVEYING (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the fundamental concepts of GPS surveying its conceptual techniques, importance,
ideas and applications.
• To effectively use GPS positioning techniques for accurate spatial data acquisition in
various applications.
• To understand the importance of proper field surveying techniques.
• Learn about the components of laser systems.
• To understand the limitations and challenges of ALS technology.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
GPS Surveying and applications- GPS System – GPS Signal – GPS Receiver – GPS Software

UNIT 2 - FIELD DEMONSTRATION METHODS 9

GPS Positioning – principles and methods – Field demonstration methods – GPS observables its
types errors and Quality – Systematic errors.
UNIT 3 - DATA PROCESSING 9
GPS data pre-processing – GPS data processing – Quality assessment of GPS Surveying – Procedure
of GPS surveying – GPS field surveying
UNIT 4 - LIDAR ALTIMETER 9
Principle and Properties of LASER- Production of Laser – Components of LASER – LiDAR – Types
of LiDAR:Range Finder, DIAL and Doppler LiDAR - Platforms: Terrestrial, Airborne and Space
borne LiDAR – Space Borne LiDAR Missions
UNIT 5 - SPACE BORNE RADAR 9
Space Borne Radar Altimeter for mapping Sea Surface Topography , Moon Topography - Merits of
ALS in comparison to Leveling, echo sounding
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

150
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Know the concept of GPS and its software
CO2: Evaluate the demonstration methods of GPS
CO3: Create the procedure of GPS surveying and its application
CO4: Know the concept of LIDAR ALTIMETER and its uses
CO5: Know the concept of SPACE BORNE RADAR and its uses

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 1 - 1 1 2
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 - 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 2 - 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 -
CO5 2 2 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 2 - 1 -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
2. Electronic Surveying in Practice, by S H Laurila, John Wiley & Sons, 1983.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chor Pang LO, Albert K. W. Yeung, “Concepts and Techniques of GeographicInformation
Systems”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, November 2016. ISBN:9789332581883
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105107158

151
 CE606410 – DIGITAL LAND SURVEYING AND MAPPING (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the importance of land surveying and mapping through digitalization with the help
of advanced techniques in surveying.
• To adjust GPS measurements and compute precise positions and uncertainties.
• Learn about the components of Total Stations.
• To gain practical experience in measuring vertical angles and heights using Total Stations.
• To understand the principles of vertical representation, contouring mapping, automated
mapping and control point establishment.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction & Applications - Fundamentals & Operations - Overview of Digital Land Surveying -
Introduction of GPS - GPS Signal (Civilian Perspective) - GPS User Segment - GPS Positioning of
Control Point

UNIT 2 - LAND SURVEY THROUGH GPS 9

Demonstration of GPS Receivers, Software and Positioning of Control Point - GPS Position Principle
of GPS Positioning & GPS Observables - Errors in GPS Observables -GPS Data Preprocessing:
Differencing, Point Positioning, Baseline Processing - GPS Data Processing - Network Adjustment
Quality Assessment of GPS Surveying
UNIT 3 - LAND SURVEY THROUGH TS 9
Introduction to Total Station - Parts of Total Station - Accessories of Total Station - Handling &
Setting of Total Station Measurement of Distance
UNIT 4 - MEASUREMENT OF TS 9
Measurement of Distance Using TS - Measurement of Horizontal Angle Using TS - Measurement of
Vertical Angle and Height Using TS - Errors in Total Station Other Errors in Total Station - Errors
and Quality of Surveying Measurements - Error Propagation and Survey Specifications
UNIT 5 - DIGITAL MAP MAKING 9
Basics of Vertical Representation - Contouring Mapping Fundamentals - Mapping Basics - Mapping
Software - Automated Mapping - Working Steps Establishment of Control Point - Detailing of Digital
Land Surveying - Demonstration of Digital Land Survey Detailing – Data Preparation and Map
Making

152
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Know the basic concepts of land survey techniques
CO2: Evaluate the methods using GPS application
CO3: Know the basic ideas about TS
CO4: Evaluate the methods and application using TS application
CO5: Create the basic ideas about map making

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 3 1 2 - 1 1 - 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 1 - 2 1 2
CO3 1 2 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 - 1 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 2 - 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 -
CO5 2 2 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 2 - 1 -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Digital Land Surveying and Mapping Hardcover – 1 August 2021 by P. K. Garg, New Age
international private limited.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R.Subramanian, Surveying and Levelling, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
2. Electronic Surveying in Practice, by S H Laurila, John Wiley & Sons, 1983.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ce08/preview

153
VERTICALS 5
 CE606501 – SOIL DYNAMICS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the principles of vibration analysis, measurement, and control, enabling them
to design and maintain mechanical systems.
• Understanding the dynamic stress-strain characteristics of soils, including their behavior
under dynamic loading conditions.
• Learn about the specific requirements and considerations for each type of foundation.
• To analysis and design principles for block-type and framed-type machine foundations.
• To understand the importance of conducting thorough site assessments.

UNIT 1 - THEORY OF VIBRATION 9

Introduction – Nature of dynamic loads – Basic definitions – Simple harmonic motion – Fundamentals
of vibration – Single degree and multi degree of freedom systems – Free vibrations of spring – Mass
systems – Forced vibrations – Resonance – Viscous damping – Principles of vibrations measuring
systems – Effect of transient and pulsating loads.

UNIT 2 - DYNAMIC SOIL PROPERTIES 9

Dynamic stress-strain characteristics – Principles of measuring dynamic properties – Laboratory
techniques – Field tests – Block vibration test – Factors affecting dynamic properties – Typical
values. Mechanism of liquefaction – Influencing factors – Evaluation of liquefaction potential –
Analysis from SPT test – Dynamic bearing capacity – Dynamic earth pressure.
UNIT 3 - MACHINE FOUNDATIONS 9
Introduction – Types of machine foundations – General requirements for design of machine
foundations – Design approach for machine foundation – Vibration analysis – Elastic Half-Space
theory – Mass-spring-dashpot model – Permissible amplitudes – Permissible bearing pressures
UNIT 4 - DESIGN OF MACHINE FOUNDATION 9
Evaluation of design parameters – Types of Machines and foundations – General requirements –their
importance – Analysis and design of block type and framed type machine foundations – Modes of
vibration of a rigid foundation – Foundations for reciprocating machines, impact machines, Two –
Cylinder vertical compressor, Double- acting steam hammer – Codal recommendations - Emprical
approach – Barken’s method – Bulb of pressure concept – Pauw’s analogy – Vibration table studies.

154
UNIT 5 - VIBRATION ISOLATION 9
Vibration isolation – Types of isolation – Transmissibility – Passive and active isolation – Methods
of isolation – Use of springs and damping materials – Properties of isolating materials – Vibration
control of existing machine foundation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge to apply theories of vibration to solve dynamic soil problems.
CO2: Evaluate the dynamic properties of soil using laboratory and field tests.
CO3: Acquire basic knowledge about machine foundations and design various types of machine
foundation.
CO4: To know and capable of selecting the types of vibration isolation materials.
CO5: To apply vibration isolation techniques for various field problems.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
1 3 - 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 - 1
CO2
1 2 - 1 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 - 1
CO3
2 1 - 1 1 1 3 2 - 1 1 2 1 2
CO4 2
1 1 2 - 2 3 2 1 - 2 3 2 1
CO5 2
1 1 1 - - 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. KameswaraRao, N.S.V., Dynamics soil tests and applications, Wheeler Publishing, New
Delhi, 2000.
2. Prakash, S and Puri, V.K., Foundations for machines, McGraw Hill, 1987.
3. Moore, P.J.,Analysis and Design of Foundations for Vibrations, Oxford and IBH, 1985.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Major, A., Vibration Analysis and Design of Foundations for Machines and Turbines, Vol. I.
II and III Budapest, 1964.
2. Barkan, D.D., Dynamics of Basis of Foundation, McGraw Hill, 1974.
3. Swami Saran, Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation, Galgotia publications Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi 2010.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.geoengineer.org/education/soil-dynamics

155
 CE606502 – ADVANCED FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To create knowledge about advancement in foundation technologies and its methodology.
• To understand the principles of raft foundation design, selection of appropriate types of rafts.
• To understand the characteristics and applications of various types of pile foundations.
• To understand the principles of vibration analysis, machine foundation design.
• Interpret earth pressure diagrams and analyze forces acting on retaining structures, including
forces in struts.

UNIT 1 – FOUNDATION DESIGN BASICS 9

Criteria for choice of foundation, bearing capacity, total and differential settlements, tolerance for
various types of structures, Interpretation of soil profile from design parameters like modulus of
compressibility, Modulus of sub grade reaction, Poisson’s ratio, etc.

UNIT 2 - RAFT FOUNDATIONS 9

Raft foundations for building and tower structures, including effects of soil-structure interaction and
nonlinearity, different types of rafts
UNIT 3 - DEEP FOUNDATIONS 9
Pile foundation-types, methods of installation, codal practices for permissible load under vertical and
lateral loads, stresses during pile driving, load carrying capacity of pile groups, negative skin friction,
under-reamed piles, Foundation for heavy structures, well foundations, caisson foundations,
equipment used for construction of these foundation systems.
UNIT 4 - MACHINE FOUNDATIONS 9
Theory of vibrations, free and forced vibrations with and without damping for a single degree freedom
system, types of machine foundations, their design criteria, permissible amplitudes and bearing
pressure.
UNIT 5 - CANTILEVER SHEET PILES AND ANCHORED BULKHEADS 9
Earth pressure diagram, determination of depth of embedment in sands and clays, timbering of
trenches, Earth pressure diagrams, forces in struts. Cofferdams: Stability, bearing capacity, settlements
(qualitative treatment only, no designs).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

156
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Identify a suitable foundation system for a structure.
CO2: Evaluate the importance of raft foundation and principles of design for buildings and tower
structures.
CO3: Analyse and design pile foundations.
CO4: Examine and discuss various machine foundations.
CO5: Analyse and design Sheet piles and cofferdams.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
1 1 - 1 1 - 1 3 1 - 1 1 - -
CO2
1 1 - 2 3 - 2 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
CO3
2 1 1 2 2 - - 2 1 - 3 2 1 1
CO4 1
3 2 2 1 1 - 1 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO5 1
2 3 1 1 2 - 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Das, B.M., “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, 4th Edition, PWS Publishing,
Singapore, 1999
2. Bowles, J.E., “Foundation Analysis and Design”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill
International,2000
3. Shamsher Prakash, “Soil Dynamics”, 3rdEdition, John Wiley publications, 2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, 4th Edition ,Sai Krupa

2. Technical Consultants, 2000.

3. Venkataramah, C., “Geotechnical Engineering”, 5th Edition, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., 2009.

4. Swami Saran, “Analysis and Design of Substructures”, 2nd Edition, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd., 2009.

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ce32/preview

157
 CE606503 – GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Learn about drainage techniques for ground water lowering, including the use of well points,
deep wells, vacuum methods, and electro-osmotic methods.
• Explore the concept and design principles of sand piles, considering factors influencing
compaction.
• To understand the importance of site investigation, soil testing, and analysis in the selection
and design of ground improvement techniques.
• To develop skills in grout monitoring and quality control to ensure proper installation and
performance.

UNIT 1 – DEWATERING 9
Introduction – Scope and necessity of ground improvement in Geotechnical engineering basic
concepts. Drainage – Ground Water lowering by well points, deep wells, vacuum and electro- osmotic
methods. Stabilization by thermal and freezing techniques - Applications.

UNIT 2 - COMPACTION AND SAND DRAINS 9

Insitu compaction of granular and cohesive soils, Shallow and Deep compaction methods – Sand
piles – Concept, design, factors influencing compaction. Blasting and dynamic consolidation –
Preloading with sand drains, fabric drains, wick drains etc. – Theories of sand drain – design and
relative merits of various methods – Case studies.
UNIT 3 - STONE COLUMN, LIME PILES AND SOIL NAILING 9
Stone column with and without encased, lime piles – Functions – Methods of installation – design,
estimation of load carrying capacity and settlement. Root piles and soil nailing – methods of
installation – Design and Applications - Soil liquefaction mitigation methods - case studies.
UNIT 4 - GEOSYNTHETICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9
Reinforcement – Principles and basic mechanism of reinforced earth, simple design: Synthetic and
natural fiber based Geotextiles and their applications. Filtration, drainage, separation, erosion control
– case studies.
UNIT 5 – GROUTING 9
Grouting – Types of grout – Suspension and solution grouts – Basic requirements of grout. Grouting
equipment – injection methods – jet grouting – grout monitoring – Electro – Chemical Stabilization –

158
Stabilization with cement, lime - Stabilization of expansive clays – case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Evaluate the ideas about dewatering and its techniques.
CO2: Create the basic knowledge about compaction and sand drains.
CO3: Evaluate the conceptual ideas about stone column, lime piles and soil nailing
CO4: Create the basic knowledge in geosynthetics and its applications
CO5: Know about various techniques about grouting

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 - 2 - 2 3 - - 1 3 1 - 2
CO2 1 3 - 1 - 1 1 - - 2 2 1 - 1
CO3 2 3 - 1 - 1 2 1 - 1 1 2 1 1
CO4 1 3 1 3 1 - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO5 2 1 2 1 2 2 - 2 2 3 1 1 - 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cox, B.R., and Grifiths S.C., Practical Recommendation for Evaluation and mitigation of Soil
Liquefaction in Arkansas, (Project Report), 2010.
2. Das, B.M., Principles of Foundation Engineering, Fourth Edition, PWS Publishing, 1999.
3. Day, R.W., Foundation Engineering Handbook, McGraw – Hill Companies, Inc. 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Han,J., Principles and Practice of Ground Improvement, John Wiley and Sons, NewJersey,
Canada2015.
2. Hehn, R.W., Practical Guide to Grouting of Underground Structures, ASCE, 1996.
3. Jewell, R.A., Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles, CIRIA, London, 1996.

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.engineeringcivil.com/ground-improvement-techniques.html

159
 CE606504- EARTHQUAKE RESITANT DESIGN OF STRUCTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know the concepts of earthquake resistant structures and its design over various methods.
• To understand the principles and methods of analysis for combined footings under earthquake
loads.
• To understand the effect of horizontal loads and moments on shallow foundations.
• To understand the effect of horizontal loads and moments on pile foundations.
• Gain knowledge of dynamic bearing capacity under transient and earthquake-type loads,
including the types of dynamic loads and their effects on foundation performance.

UNIT 1 – INTRODUTION 9
General requirements - Types of shallow and deep foundations and their use - Performance of various
types of foundations during past earthquakes.

UNIT 2 - SHALLOW FOUNDATION 9

Shallow Foundations - IS codes for bearing capacity and settlement of foundations - Foundation
design - Modes of soil failure - Shallow Foundations- Safe bearing capacity - Differential & total
settlements - Increase in permissible stress under earthquake loads - Methods of analysis- Combined
footings for earthquake loads - Shallow Foundations - Raft foundation - Modulus of subgrade reaction
- Winkler model
UNIT 3 - SHALLOW UNDER ELASSTIC CONCEPT 9
Beam on elastic foundation - Dynamic Bearing Capacity under Transient & Earthquake Type Loads
- Types of dynamic loads - Footing requirements to account for settlements and earthquake-induced
forces - Pseudo-Static analysis of footings with eccentric & inclined loads - Effect of horizontal load
and moment - Dynamic Analysis of shallow foundations for various modes of vibrations
UNIT 4 - PILE FOUNDATION 9
Types of piles based on usage, material, construction etc. - Pile load capacity in compression Bearing
capacity of piles - Group action of piles - Settlement of a pile group - Pile Foundations - Laterally
loaded piles, elastic analysis - Reese and Matlock approach, fixity of pile heads, - dimensionless
factors.
UNIT 5 - PILE UNDER DYNAMIC LOADS 9
Pile with dynamic loads - Pile Foundations - Soil-pile analysis with spring-mass & FEM idealization

160
- Elements for slip and separation - Soil-pile interaction - IS code of practice for the design of pile
foundations - Piles through liquefiable soils
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Create basic knowledge towards earthquake loads
CO2: Evaluate the concepts over shallow foundation
CO3: Evaluate the concepts over shallow foundation under elastic concept
CO4: Evaluate the concepts over pile foundation
CO5: Evaluate the concepts over pile foundation under dynamic loads

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 - 2 - 1 1 2
CO2 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 - 1 - 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 - 2 2 - 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 2 1 2 - 1 1 - 1 1 2 2 - 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 - 1 2 - 1 - 1 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Das, B.M., “Principles of Foundation Engineering”, 4th Edition, PWS Publishing, Singapore,
1999
2. Bowles, J.E., “Foundation Analysis and Design”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill International,
2000
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, 4th Edition ,Sai Krupa
Technical Consultants, 2000
2. Venkataramah, C., “Geotechnical Engineering”, 5th Edition, New Age International Pvt. Ltd.,
2009
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://sjce.ac.in/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/EQ4-Earthquake-Resistant.pdf

161
 CE606505 – GEOTECHNIQUES FOR INFRASTRUCTURE
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the principles, procedures, and limitations of each field testing method.
• To understand the specific considerations for designing shallow foundations for railway and
highway bridges, as well as port and harbor structures.
• To understand the axial load-bearing capacity of piles and methods for its calculation.
• To understand the fundamental principles of foundation engineering and their application.
• To evaluate the design and stability of anchored sheet pile walls.

UNIT 1 – SITE INVESTIGATION FOR INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Site Investigation for Infrastructure Projects: methods of site investigation, types of soil samples and
samplers- Geotechnical field testing – SPT, CPT, Plate Load Test, Pile Load Test.

UNIT 2 - SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS FOR INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Shallow Foundations for Railway & Highway Bridges and Port & Harbour Structures: types of
foundations, design forces, safe and allowable bearing capacity of shallow foundations, settlement
computation
UNIT 3 - PILE FOUNDATIONS FOR INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9
Pile Foundations for Railway & Highway Bridges and Port & Harbour Structures: Pile foundations –
types, axial and lateral capacity of pile, pile group analysis and pile cap - Introduction to drilled piers,
caissons, well foundations.
UNIT 4 - FOUNDATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL TOWERS 9
Foundations for Transmission Line, Radar Antenna, Microwave and TV Tower and Chimneys:
Introduction, foundations for towers and chimneys, design forces, behaviour of pad and chimney
foundations, design of chimney and pad foundations, anchor foundations (rock anchors), design of
foundations for towers and chimneys, analysis of raft on pile foundations; design and construction of
shallow foundations on rocks.
UNIT 5 - SHEET PILE FOR INFRASTRUCTURE 9
Sheet Piles – introduction, types of sheet pile walls, cantilever sheet pile wall, anchored sheet pile wall,
stability analysis of anchored bulkhead by free earth support and fixed earth support method, position of
anchorage. Expansive and Collapsible Soil: Difficult soils- loose granular soils, soft clays and shrinkable

162
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Create basic site investigation for infrastructure projects.
CO2: Evaluate basic ideas in shallow foundations.
CO3: Evaluate basic ideas in deep foundations.
CO4: Evaluate basic ideas in foundation for electrical towers.
CO5: Evaluate basic ideas in sheet piles.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 - 2 1 2 3 1 - 2 - 1 1 3
CO2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 - 1 - 1 2 2
CO3 2 2 - 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 - 2 1 1
CO4 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO5 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Analysis and Design of Shallow and Deep Foundations, Lymon C Reese, William M Isenhower
and Shin-Tower Wang, John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
2. Analysis and Design of Substructures, Swami Saran, Oxford and IBH Publishing, New Delhi,
2008.
3. Design of Foundation Systems, Ninan P Kurian, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Soil Mechanics and foundation engineering – P. Purushottama Raj, Pearson Education.
2. Construction of marine and offshore structures – Ben C Gerwick, jr., CRC Press, Taylor and
Francis Group.
3. Pile design and construction practice – M J Tomlinson, View point Publications, Palladian
Publications Limited.
4. IS: 4091 (1979) -Design and construction of foundations for transmission line towers
5. IS: 11233 (1985) – Design and construction of foundations forRadar Antenna, Microwave and
TV Tower.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.amrita.edu/course/geotechnics infrastructure/

163
 CE606506 – EARTH AND EARTH RETAINING STRUTURES
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the state of stress within retained soil masses.
• To develop critical thinking skills to identify potential failure modes and assess risk factors.
• To understand the principles of soil-structure interaction and the behavior of sheet pile walls
under different loading scenarios.
• To understand the mechanisms of soil movement and the potential risks associated with
seepage and soil liquefaction.
• To understand the basic principles of slurry-supported trenches and their applications.

UNIT 1 - EARTH PRESSURE THEORIES 9

Introduction – State of stress in retained soil mass – Earth pressure theories – Classical and graphical
techniques (Culmann’s method) – Active and passive cases – Earth pressure due to external loads.
UNIT 2 - COMPACTION, DRAINAGE AND STABILITY OF RETAINING
9
STRUCTURES
Retaining structure – Selection of soil parameters - Lateral pressure due to compaction, strain
softening, wall flexibility, drainage arrangements and its influence. – Stability analysis of retaining
structure both for regular and earthquake forces.
UNIT 3 - SHEET PILE WALLS 9
Types of sheet piles - Analysis and design of cantilever and anchored sheet pile walls – free earth
support method – fixed earth support method. Design of anchor systems - isolated and continuous.
UNIT 4 - SUPPORTED EXCAVATIONS 9
Lateral pressure on sheeting in braced excavation, stability against piping and bottom heaving. Earth
pressure around tunnel lining, shaft and silos – Soil anchors – Soil pinning –Basic design concepts.
UNIT 5 - SLURRY SUPPORTED EXACAVATION 9
Slurry supported trenches-basic principles-slurry characteristics-specifications-diaphragm walls bored
pile walls-contiguous pile wall-secant piles-stability analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

164
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Analyse the earth pressure acting on retaining structures by applying classical theories
considering all influencing parameters and suggest the earth pressure to be considered for
the design of retaining structures.
CO2: Apply the knowledge of engineering and earth pressure to analyse and design rigid
retaining structures considering effect of compaction, wall flexibility, pore water pressure
and earth quake forces.
CO3: Apply the knowledge of engineering and earth pressure to analyse and design flexible earth
retaining walls and also acquire the knowledge of design of anchors
CO4: Apply the knowledge on lateral earth pressure behind and around excavation to analyse and
design braced excavations, slurry supported excavations and underground utilities.
CO5: To understand the role of slurry in supporting excavations and to perform stability analysis
by considering the actual shape of slurry support
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 -
CO2 1 2 1 2 2 - 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 -
CO3 2 3 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 2 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 - 1
CO5 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 - 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Clayton, C.R.I., Militisky, J. and Woods, R.I., Earth pressure and Earth-Retaining structures,
Second Edition, Survey University Press, 1993.
2. Das, B.M., Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Fourth Edition, The PWS series in Civil
Engineering, 1998.
3. Militisky, J. and Woods, R., Earth and Earth retaining structures, Routledge,1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Winterkorn, H.F. and Fang, H.Y., Foundation Engineering Handbook, GalgotiaBooksource,
2000.
2. Koerner, R.M. Designing with Geosynthetics, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.laterlite.com/applications/geotechnical/earth-retaining-structures/

165
 CE606507 – SOIL STRUCTURE INTERACTION
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To study various soil response models used in soil-foundation interaction analysis.
• To investigate the analysis of beams of finite length.
• To understand numerical methods commonly used for the analysis of finite plates.
• To apply theoretical concepts and analytical methods.
• To understand the principles of dynamic loads and their effects on ground-foundation
interaction.

UNIT 1 - SOIL-FOUNDATION INTERACTION 9

Introduction to soil-foundation interaction problems, Soil behaviour, Foundation behaviour, Interface
behaviour, Scope of soil foundation interaction analysis, soil response models, Winkler, Elastic
continuum, Two parameter elastic models, Elastic-plastic behaviour, Time dependent behaviour.

UNIT 2 - BEAM ON ELASTIC FOUNDATION- SOIL MODELS 9

Infinite beam, Two-parameter models, Isotropic elastic half space model, Analysis of beams of finite
length, combined footings.
UNIT 3 - PLATES ON ELASTIC CONTINUUM 9
Thin and thick rafts, Analysis of finite plates, Numerical analysis of finite plates.
UNIT 4 - ANALYSIS OF AXIALLY AND LATERALLY LOADED PILES AND PILE
9
GROUPS
Elastic analysis of single pile, Theoretical solutions for settlement and load distributions, Analysis of
pile group, Interaction analysis, Load distribution in groups with rigid cap, Load deflection prediction
for laterally loaded piles, Subgrade reaction and elastic analysis, Interaction analysis, Pile-raft system
UNIT 5 - GROUND-FOUNDATION- STRUCTURE INTERACTION 9
Effect of structure on ground-foundation interaction, Static and dynamic loads.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

166
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Evaluate the concepts of soil-foundation interaction.
CO2: Create the basic concepts of beam on elastic foundation – soil models.
CO3: Create the basic concepts of plates on elastic continuum.
CO4: Evaluate the analysis of axially and laterally loaded piles and pile groups.
CO5: Evaluate the basic concepts of ground –foundation-structure interaction.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 3 - 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 - 1 2
CO2 1 2 - - 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 1 1 - 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 2
CO5 2 2 2 1 - 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rolando P. Orense, Nawawi Chouw & Michael J. Pender – Soil-Foundation-Structure

Interaction, CRC Press, 2010 Taylor & Francis Group, London, UK.

2. Selvadurai, A. P. S. – Elastic Analysis of Soil-Foundation Interaction, 1979

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Soil Structure Interaction – The real behaviour of structures, the institution of structural
engineers, London, March 1989.
2. Poulos, H. G., and Davis, E. H. – Pile Foundation Analysis and Design, 1980
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105105200

167
 CE606508 – GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the principles and concepts of geotechnical earthquake engineering.
• To understand the uses and applications of strong ground motion and wave propagation data
in earthquake engineering.
• To understand the methods for measuring and estimating dynamic soil properties.
• To develop proficiency in conducting seismic hazard analysis and site response analysis.
• To explore the principles of seismic design for geotechnical structures.
UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering - Basics of Vibration Theory - Engineering
Seismology

UNIT 2 - GROUND MOTION 9

Strong Ground Motion - Wave Propagation – its uses and applications
UNIT 3 - DYNAMIC SOIL PROPERTIES 9
Dynamic Soil Properties – its types, applications and uses
UNIT 4 - HAZARD ANALYSIS 9
Seismic Hazard Analysis - Site Response Analysis – various types
UNIT 5 - ANALYSIS AND DESIGN ON GEOTECHNICAL STRUCTURES 9
Seismic Analysis and Design of Various Geotechnical Structures and its types
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of geotechnical earthquake engineering.
CO2: Know about the ground motion.
CO3: Create the basic concepts of dynamic soil properties.
CO4: Understand the basic ideas about hazard analysis and response analysis.
CO5: Evaluate the basic ideas about the analysis and design on geotechnical structures.

CO-PO MAPPING

168
 CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 2 - 2 2 1 - 2
CO2 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 3 - 1 1 3 - 1
CO3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 - 1 2 - 1
CO4 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 - - 1 - 2
CO5 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Murthy, V.N.S., “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, CBS Publishers Distribution
Ltd., New Delhi. 2015
2. Gopal Ranjan and Rao, A.S.R., “Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics”, New Age Ltd.
International Publisher New Delhi (India) 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Das, B.M., “Principles of Geotechnical Engineering”. Brooks / Coles / Thompson Learning
Singapore, 8th Edition, 2013.
2. Punmia, B.C., “Soil Mechanics and Foundations”, Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi,
2005
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105101134

169
 CE606509 – UNSATURATED SOIL MECHANICS (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the mechanisms governing water retention and drainage characteristics in
unsaturated soils.
• To understand the concept of water retention in soils and its significance.
• To investigate laboratory testing techniques for suction-controlled direct shear tests.
• To understand the properties and behavior of bentonite clay.
• To explore the importance of unsaturated soil mechanics.

UNIT 1 - FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES AND CONSTITUTIVE RELATIONSHIPS 9

Fundamental Aspects of Unsaturated Soil Mechanics and its Basic Principles - Phases of Unsaturated
Soils-I - Phases of Unsaturated Soils-II - Equilibrium between Air and Water Phases - Capillary
Phenomenon in Unsaturated Soils-I - Capillary Phenomenon in Unsaturated Soils-II

UNIT 2 - SUCTION MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9

Concept of Water Retention and Soil Water Characteristics - Hydraulic conductivity functions and
determination of state variables - Suction Measurement/Control Techniques - HCF Determination -
SWCC and HCF Models - HCF Modeling - Fitting of SWCC & HCF modeling - Pedo-transfer
Functions (PTF)
UNIT 3 - STEADY-STATE FLOW THROUGH SOILS 9
Steady-State & Transient Flow - Analytical Methods for Transient Flow - Shear Strength of
Unsaturated Soils - Suction-Controlled Direct Shear Test - Suction-Controlled Triaxial Test -
Extended M-C Criterion - Concept of "Suction Stress"
UNIT 4 - SHEAR STRENGTH OF UNSATURATED SOILS 9
Estimation of Swelling Pressure in the Laboratory and Behaviour of Collapsible soil Volume Change
Behaviour of Bentonite and Kaolin Clay
UNIT 5 - VOLUME CHANGE SWELLING BEHAVIOR OF SOILS 9
Introduction to Volume Change Swelling Behavior of Soils - Demonstration of Various Experiments
Related to Unsaturated Soil Mechanics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

170
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Evaluate the concepts of fundamental principle and constitutive relationships.
CO2: Evaluate the concepts of suction measurement and control techniques.
CO3: Create the basic concepts steady state flow through soils.
CO4: Create the basic ideas about shear strength of unsaturated soils.
CO5: Evaluate the conceptual ideas of swelling behavior of soil.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 3 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 - 1 2 1 2
CO2 2 2 1 2 1 - 1 2 1 - 2 1 1 1
CO3 1 - 2 1 2 - 1 1 1 - 2 1 2 1
CO4 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 3
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Analysis and Design of Shallow and Deep Foundations, Lymon C Reese, William M
Isenhower and Shin-Tower Wang, John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
2. Analysis and Design of Substructures, Swami Saran, Oxford and IBH Publishing, New
Delhi, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Winterkorn, H.F. and Fang, H.Y., Foundation Engineering Handbook, Galgotia
Booksource, 2000.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105103177

171
CE606510 – GEOSYNTHETICS ENGINEERING IN THEORYAND IN PRACTICE (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To gain knowledge of the different types of geosynthetics.
• To understand the mechanisms and concepts of pavement engineering.
• To understand the construction procedures for geotechnical structures using various facing
elements.
• To understand the principles and applications of geocell/geofoam systems.
• To understand the advantages of using the LSS model in slope stability analysis.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Background of reinforced earth, mechanism and concepts, Basis of reinforced earth wall design. -
Geosynthetics classifications, functions, applications, raw materials used.- Different types of
Geosynthetics, manufacturing, system, Design and sustainability. - Various properties of
Geosynthetics, physical properties, mechanical properties, hydraulic properties & endurance
properties, Nano material. - Mechanism of filtration and drainage functions & their applications, -
Design step for erosion control and geocomposite drainage.

UNIT 2 - MECHANISM AND CONCEPTS 9

Mechanisms and concept of pavement, design of unpaved road, Giroud and Noiray method, U.S.
Forest services, airfield pavement design, reflection cracking, pavement rehabilitation and repair,
Nano material.
UNIT 3 - TYPES OF FACING ELEMENTS 9
Different types of facing elements, construction procedure, cost, design of Geosynthetics wrap around
faced wall, geogrid reinforced soil walls, geocell wall, gabion wall. Model for single and multi-layer
reinforced slopes, guidelines for design of reinforced slopes, software for reinforced soil slopes.
Design of basal reinforced embankment, placement of Geosynthetics, construction procedure,
widening of existing road embankments. Consolidation techniques, Development of design chart for
prefabricated vertical drains, ground instrumentation and monitoring, Design of encased stone
columns
UNIT 4 - GEOFOAM SYSTEMS 9
geocell/geofoam systems. Bearing capacity of Geosynthetics reinforced soil system, geocell
reinforced sand overlaying soft clay. Geotextile tubes, geotextile containers, geotextile bags,

172
dewatering waste and contaminated sediments, installation and design of geotextile tube.
UNIT 5 - GEOFOAM PROPERTIES 9
Design of landfill liner, veneer slope stability without and with seismic analysis, run out length,
settlement of landfill, advantage of LSS model. Applications, advantage, function of geofoam,
physical, mechanical and thermal properties of geofoam, design of embankment using geofoam,
geofoam reinforced soil walls, New light weight fill material.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Create the basic introductory form of geosynthetics and its importance.
CO2: Evaluate the ideas about mechanism of geosynthetics.
CO3: Create the basic concepts and types of facing element.
CO4: Evaluate the ideas about geoform system
CO5: Evaluate the ideas about landfill liner.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 - 3 1 2 2 1 3 1 - 2 - 1 2
CO2 1 1 2 2 1 - 2 2 1 - 1 1 2 1
CO3 1 3 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 - 1 2 1 1
CO4 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
CO5 1 1 1 2 3 2 - 2 - 2 - 1 1 -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Clayton, C.R.I., Militisky, J. and Woods, R.I., Earth pressure and Earth-Retaining structures,
Second Edition, Survey University Press, 1993.
2. Das, B.M., Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Fourth Edition, The PWS series in Civil
Engineering, 1998.
3. Militisky, J. and Woods, R., Earth and Earth retaining structures, Routledge,1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Winterkorn, H.F. and Fang, H.Y., Foundation Engineering Handbook, GalgotiaBooksource,
2000.
2. Koerner, R.M. Designing with Geosynthetics, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 1997.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105101143

173
VERTICALS 6
 CE606601 – RAILWAY INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING AND DESIGN
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know about railway track components and function.
• To assess geometric design of railway track
• To study the track construction and maintenance.
• To learn the crossings and safety of railway tracks.
• To study the station yards of railway station.

UNIT 1 - RAILWAY PLANNING 9

General: Development of railways in India, Permanent way and railway track components, different
gauges in India, conning of wheels, Functions of various Components - Rails, Sleepers and Ballast,
Rails - types of rails, rail sections, defects in rails, creep of rails, rail fixtures and fastenings, rail joints
and welding of rails, sleepers – types, spacing and density, Ballast – types, advantages and
disadvantages, Subgrade – Requirement, embankment.

UNIT 2 - GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF RAILWAY TRACK 9

Gradients, grade compensation, speed of trains on curves, super elevation, cant deficiency, negative
super elevation, curves, widening on curves. Track layouts, Switches, Tongue Rails, Crossings,
Layout of Turnout – Double Turnout, Diamond crossing, Scissors crossing.
UNIT 3 - TRACK CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE 9
Track laying, inspection and maintenance, maintenance tools, maintenance of rail surface, track
drainage, track tolerances, mechanized method, ballast confinement and directed track maintenance,
bridge maintenance, renewal, classification of renewal works, mechanized relaying, track renewal
trains.
UNIT 4 - SIGNALING, INTERLOCKING AND SAFETY 9
Objectives, classification, fixed signals, stop signals, signaling systems, mechanical signaling system,
electrical signaling system, systems for controlling train movement, interlocking, modern signaling
installations. Safety measures classification of level crossings, accidents at level crossings, remedial
measures, maintenance of level crossings.
UNIT 5 - RAILWAY STATION AND YARDS 9
Site selection, facilities, classification, platforms, building areas, types of yards, catch sidings, slip
sidings, foot over bridges, subways, cranes, weighbridge, loading gauge, end loading ramps,

174
locomotive sheds, triangles, traverser, carriage washing platforms, buffer stop, scotch block, derailing
switch, sand hump, fouling mark.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Plan the railway network.
CO2: Determine factors governing the design of railway infrastructure.
CO3: Develop maintenance strategies for the railway track system
CO4: Design the railway track system and identify a suitable signal system
CO5: Recommend suitable measures for the safety of the railway network

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 2 - 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 - 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 - 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 - 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 2 - 2 - - 1 - 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Saxena, S.C., and Arora, S.P A Textbook of Railway Engineering, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, India, 2017, 8th Edition.

2. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering", Scitech

Publications, 7th Edition 2010.

3. Mundrey, J.S Railway Track Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, New
Delhi, India, 2017, 5th Edition
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Venkatramaiah. C., Transportation Engineering-Vol.2 Railways, Airports, Docks and
Harbours Bridges and Tunnels, Orient Blackswan Private Limited, Kindle Edition, 2018
2. Rangwala, S.C Railway Engineering, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Anand, India,
2017, 27th Edition.
3. Chandra, S., and Agarwal, M.M , Railway Engineering,., Oxford University Press, Noida,
India, 2013, 2nd Edition.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://rdso.indianrailways.gov.in
2. https://www.iricen.gov.in

175
 CE606602 – AIRPORT INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING AND DESIGN
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the airport planning and layout.
• To study the runway and taxiway orientation.
• To find the structural airport design pavements.
• To study the lighting and marking systems.
• To find the terminal planning and area design.

UNIT 1 – AIRPORT PLANNING 8

Air transport characteristics - airport classification – ICAO - airport planning- Site selection typical -
Airport layouts, case studies, parking and circulation area.

UNIT 2 - GEOMETRIC DESIGN OF AIRFIELD 10

Airport classification - runway configuration - runway orientation - wind rose diagram ( problems) -
estimating runway length - sight distance and longitudinal profile - transverse gradient - airfield
separation requirements - obstacle clearance requirements. Taxiway and taxilane separation
requirements - sight distance and longitudinal profile - exit taxiway geometry - location of exit
taxiways - design of taxiway curves and intersections - end-around taxiways - aprons
UNIT 3 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF AIRPORT PAVEMENTS 9
FAA pavement design methods - equivalent aircraft method - cumulative damage failure method -
design of flexible pavements - design of rigid pavements – joints - joint spacing - continuously
reinforced concrete pavements - design of pavement overlays.
UNIT 4 - AIRPORT LIGHTING, MARKING, AND SIGNAGE 8
Requirements - approach lighting system configurations - visual approach slope aids – threshold
lighting - runway lighting - taxiway lighting - runway and taxiway marking - airfield signage.
UNIT 5 - PLANNING AND DESIGN OF TERMINAL AREA 10
Passenger terminal system - design considerations - terminal demand parameters – facility
classification - level of service criteria. Terminal planning process - overall space requirements -
Concept development - horizontal distribution concepts - vertical distribution concepts. Apron gate
system - number of gates - ramp charts - gate size - aircraft parking type - apron layout. - Apron
circulation - passenger conveyance to aircraft - apron utility requirements.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

176
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Gain an insight on the planning and site selection of airport planning.
CO2: Determine the orientation of runways.
CO3: Design geometrics of the airport infrastructure.
CO4: Determine the lighting and marking systems.
CO5: Design thickness of the runway, taxiway, and apron.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 - 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 1 - 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Khanna.S.K. Arora.M.G and Jain.S.S, Airport Planning and Design, Nem Chand & Bros,

6th Edition 2022

2. Robert Honjeff and Francis X.Mckelvey, "Planning and Design of Airports, McGraw-Hill

Education, 5th Edition 2010.

3. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering", Scitech

Publications, 7th Edition 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. 1. Sharma S. K, Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering Including Airport

Pavements, S. Chand Publishing, 2014

2. Venkatramaiah. C., Transportation Engineering-Vol.2 Railways, Airports, Docks and

Harbours Bridges and Tunnels, Orient Blackswan Private Limited, Kindle Edition, 2018

3. Young, S.B., and Wells, A.T, Airport Planning and Management, McGraw-Hill

Education, New York, USA, 7th Edition 2019.

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/114/106/114106025/
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/107/105107123/

177
 CE606603 – WATERWAY INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING AND DESIGN
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know about harbour planning and site investigation.
• To study the construction of breakwaters and navigations.
• To learn the harbour repair works and facilities.
• To study the demand estimation and port facilities.
• To assess the coastal production and inland transportation.

UNIT 1 – HARBOUR PLANNING 10

Types of water transportation, water transportation in India, requirements of ports and harbors,
classification of harbors, selection of site and planning of harbors, location of harbor, traffic
estimation, master plan, ship characteristics, harbor design, turning basin, harbor entrances, type of
docks, its location and number, Site investigations – hydrographic survey, topographic survey, soil
investigations, current observations, tidal observations.

UNIT 2 - HARBOUR WORKS 8

Design and construction of breakwaters, berthing structures - jetties, fenders, piers, wharves,
dolphins, trestle, moles, navigational aids, requirements of signals, fixed navigation structures, the
necessity of navigational aids, light houses, beacon lights, floating navigational aids, light ships,
buoys, radar.
UNIT 3 - DOCKS AND REPAIR FACILITIES 9
Harbor docks, use of wet docks, design of wet docks, repair docks, lift docks, dry docks, keel and
bilge blocking, construction of dry docks, gates for dry docks, pumping plant, floating docks,
slipways, locks, size of the lock, lock gates, types of gates
UNIT 4 - PORT FACILITIES AND DEMAND ESTIMATION 9
Port development, port planning, port building facilities, transit sheds, warehouses, cargo handling
facilities, container handling terminal facilities, shipping terminals, inland port facilities. Forecasting
demand for services of a new port, Optimal handling capacity estimation, Evaluation, and
management of port projects - Long-term port planning
UNIT 5 – DREDGING AND COASTAL PROTECTION 9
Classification, types of dredgers, choice of dredger, uses of dredged materials, coastal erosion and
protection, sea wall, revetment, bulkhead, coastal zone, and beach profile. Inland Navigation: Inland

178
waterways, Inland water transportation in India, classification of waterways, the economics of inland
waterways transportation, national waterways.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Plan and design harbour facilities.
CO2: Discriminate harbour works, berthing structure.
CO3: Design repair facilities and construction of dry docks
CO4: Design port facilities and forecasting demand
CO5: Design coastal protection facilities, plan navigational aids and inland navigation for
safe operations

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 - 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 - 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 - 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering", Scitech
Publications, 7th Edition 2010.
2. Bindra, S.P, Docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 2012, 9th Edition.
3. Srinivasan R. and Rangwala S.C , Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering,., Charotar
Publishing House, 2018, 29th Edition
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Venkatramaiah. C., Transportation Engineering-Vol.2 Railways, Airports, Docks and
Harbours Bridges and Tunnels, Orient Blackswan Private Limited, Kindle Edition, 2018
2. Seetharaman, S, Dock and Harbour Engineering, , Umesh Publications, New Delhi, India,
1999
3. Hasmukh P. Oza and Gautam H. Oza, Dock and Harbour Engineering, Charotar Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, 2012.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/114/106/114106025/#
2. http://dredge-india.nic.in/ops-main-page.html

179
 CE606604 – ROAD SAFETY SYSTEM
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To helps in identifying the reasons for road accidents.
• To learn the all safety measure in accident.
• To helps in identifying the scientific Investigation of road accidents.
• To provides knowledge on road safety audit.
• To assess the accident cast methodology.

UNIT 1 – INTRODUTION 9
Accident Scenarios – Global, National , Regional and Mega City Levels - Causes of accidents –
Human factors – Vehicles – Road and its condition – Environmental Factors- Conventional methods
and Inadequacies- Case studies – Application of Dynamic Simulation Modeling in Accident
Prediction

UNIT 2 - ACCIDENT STUDIES 9

Accident Data Collection - Accident prevention- Types of Statistics- Accident Rates – Statistical
Methods in Accident Analysis-Crash reconstruction Theories –All Safety Measures for Road Safety -
Computer Record Systems –RADMS- Case studies.
UNIT 3 - ACCIDENT ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES 9
Collision and Condition Diagram – Preparation, Spatial Analysis of Accidents – Methods and GIS in
Accident Analysis - Black Spot, Black Route and Area Identification. Conventional Accident
Prediction Models – Development – Empirical Bayees Approach – Before and After Evaluation –
Case Studies
UNIT 4 - ROAD SAFETY AUDIT 9
Introduction to safety- Road safety management system- Need for Road Safety Audit – Concept and
Elements of Safety Audit – Safety Audit for existing roads – Legal requirements – Provisions of Motor
Vehicle Act and role of NGO‟s in prevention of accidents. Case Studies.
UNIT 5 - ACCIDENT COSTING 9
Trends in cost of Road Accidents - Significance -– Conventional Methods - Application of Dynamic
Modeling in Crash Costing-Economic Analysis of Road Accident Cost in India.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

180
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Apply the knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals in developing an efficient
road safety system.
CO2: Explain concepts and analysis of accident data collection and studies.
CO3: Knowledge in accident analysis techniques with various advanced methods.
CO4: Concepts & Significance of road safety audit and management system with case studies.
CO5: Conduct research pertinent to road accident costing and to communicate effectively to
different stakeholders as well as engage in independent life-long learning
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering", Scitech
Publications, 7th Edition 2010.
2. Dhillon B.S, “Transportation Systems Reliability and Safety”-, CRC Press Publication, USA,
1st Edition 2011.
3. Martin Belcher, Steve Proctor and Phil Cook (2011), “Practical Road Safety Auditing”-, ICE
Publication, Scotland, 3rd Edition 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Geetam Tiwari, Dinesh Mohan, “Transport Planning and Traffic Safety: Making Cities, Roads,
and Vehicles Safety”- CRC Press Publication, USA 1st Edition, 2016.
2. Ministry of Surface Transport, "Accident Investigation and Prevention Manual for Highway
Engineers in India, Government of India, 2001.
3. Martin Belchar,”Practical Road Safety Auditing”, Ice Publishing, 2015
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://ncert.nic.in/vocational/pdf/ivas104.pdf
2. https://roadsafety.piarc.org/en/road-safety-management/safe-system-approach

181
 CE606605 – INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To learn the fundamentals of ITS.
• To study the ITS functional areas
• To learn the ITS traffic management.
• To provides knowledge on ITS planning and network operation.
• To have an overview of ITS implementation in developing countries

UNIT 1 – ITS HISTORY 9

ITS Background and Telemetric systems: Definitions, features, and objectives of ITS, History of ITS
and its development worldwide, telemetric concept, transport telemetric, telemetric structure, ITS
taxonomy, ITS application areas, uses, and application overview.

UNIT 2 - DATA COLLECTION THROUGH ITS 9

Sensors & its application in traffic data collection - Elements of Vehicle Location and Route Navigation
and Guidance concepts; ITS Data collection techniques – vehicle Detectors, Automatic Vehicle Location
(AVL), Automatic Vehicle Identification (AVI), GIS, RFID, video data collection, Internet of Things
(IOT)
UNIT 3 - ITS IN TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 9
ITS User Needs and Services and Functional areas –Introduction, Advanced Traffic Management
systems (ATMS), Advanced Traveler Information systems (ATIS), Advanced Vehicle Control systems
(AVCS), Advanced Public Transportation systems (APTS), Advanced Rural Transportation systems
(ARTS)- Autonomous Vehicles- Autonomous Intersections.
UNIT 4 - ITS IN TRANSPORTATION PLANNING 9
ITS and safety, ITS and security- Traffic and incident management systems; ITS and sustainable
mobility, travel demand management, electronic toll collection, ITS and road-pricing; Transportation
network operations – public transportation applications- Weight –in Motion.
UNIT 5 - ITS APPLICATION IN LOGISTICS 9
Commercial vehicle operations and intermodal freight-Fleet Management- IT application in freight
logistics-E commerce - ITS standards - development process - legal issues - financial issues-
Mainstreaming ITS- integration and up-gradation - Future of ITS - case studies

182
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Identify and differentiate ITS user services and their components.
CO2: Gain knowledge on data collection using sensors and its applications.
CO3: Acquainted with the knowledge of ITS in Traffic Management
CO4: Application of ITS in Transportation Planning
CO5: Select suitable standards for effective implementation of ITS.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 3 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 2 1 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 1

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srinivasa Kumar R,”Intelligent Transportation Systems”, Universities Press P Ltd, Telangana,
2022
2. Chowdhury M.A. and A. Sadek, Fundamentals of Intelligent Transportation Systems Planning,
Artech House, 2010, 1st Edition.
3. Sarkar, Pradip Kumar, and Amit Kumar Jain, Intelligent Transport Systems, PHI Learning, 2018,
1st Edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Intelligent Transport Systems: Cases and Policies, RogerStough, Edward Elgar, 2001.
2. Henry F.Korth, and Abraham Siberschatz, Data Base System Concepts, McGraw
Hill,1992
3. Kan Paul Chen, John Miles ITS Hand Book 2000: Recommendations for World Road
Association (PIARC).
WEB RESOURCES:

1. http://digital-library.theiet.org/content/journals/iet-its
2. https://www.its.dot.gov/research_areas/data_access.html

183
 CE606606 – ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF TRANSPORTATION
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To know about EIA Concepts.
• To learn the environmental law and regulations.
• To study the prediction of environmental pollutions
• To find the EIA methodologies.
• To assess the mitigation measures and polices of transport technologies.

UNIT 1 - TRANSPORT AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Environment and its interaction with human activities - Environmental imbalances - Attributes,
Impacts, Indicators and Measurements - Concept of Environmental Impact Assessment,
Environmental Impact Statement, Objectives of EIA, Advantages and Limitations of EIA.
UNIT 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, LAWS AND REGULATIONS 9
Laws protecting the environment include environmental protection, air, noise pollution, motor vehicle
acts, town and country planning, and development control regulation.
UNIT 3 - PREDICTION OF AIR AND NOISE POLLUTION 9
Factors affecting air pollution from road traffic - vehicle characteristics - engine types - vehicle age
and maintenance - driving conditions - average speed - temperature - meteorological conditions -
emission inventory - dispersion of pollutants - inverse air quality models - emission and
dispersion models - driving cycles - macroscopic and microscopic modeling at the Microscopic level
of air pollution from road traffic - road traffic noise model (RTNM) – Calixto model - acoustical
assessment.
UNIT 4 - METHODOLOGIES 9
Methodologies Criteria - Adhoc – checklist - matrix - network- overlays - benefit-cost analysis -
choosing a methodology - IRC code.
UNIT 5 - MITIGATION MEASURES AND POLICIES 9
Cleaner fuels - vehicle technology - replacement strategies improving fuel efficiency - encouraging
non-motorized and public transport - taxation on emissions - noise barriers - land use planning -
resurfacing roads with low-noise materials - managing traffic flows – advanced construction methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

184
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Examine the effect of transportation on the environment.
CO2: Differentiate various environmental standards
CO3: Estimate air pollution and noise pollution due to surface transportation.
CO4: Carryout an environmental impact assessment.
CO5: Apply various measures to mitigate the pollution caused by transportation.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 - 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 - 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Louis Franklin Cohen and Gary Richard McVoy, Environmental Analysis of Transportation
Systems, , John Wiley & Sons, 1982.
2. Peter Morris and RikiTherivel, Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment (Natural and
Built Environment Series), Routledge, 2009, 3rd Edition.
3. Anjaneyulu Y and Valli Manickam, Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies, BS
Publications, 2nd Edition, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Canter, L.W., Environmental Impact Assessment, McGraw Hill Pub. Co., New York, 1997
2. Guidelines for Environmental Impact Assessment for Highway Projects, IRC: 104, Indian
Roads Congress, India, 1988.
3. Transport Policy and Environment, David Banister, E&FN Spain,1999
WEB RESOURCES:
1. http://www.nap.edu/catalog/10354.html
2. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/105107210/L15.html

185
 CE606607 – TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To identifying traffic characteristics and survey.
• To learn the traffic flow and design service.
• To identifying the traffic management techniques.
• To provides knowledge on design of road intersection.
• To assess parking plan and design criteria.

UNIT 1 - TRAFFIC SURVEYS AND ANALYSES 9

Traffic characteristics: Human, vehicular, and Pavement Characteristics, Problems- presentation of
traffic volume data, Annual Average Daily Traffic, Average Daily Traffic, Design hourly traffic
volume; Speed- spot speed, presentation of spot speed data, speed and delay studies, methods of
conducting spot-speed studies and Speed and Delay studies; Problems Origin and Destination –
methods of conducting the survey and presentation of data; parking surveys, presentation of data and
analyses, determination of parking demand; Accident studies and analyses; Different problems.

UNIT 2 - TRAFFIC FLOW AND ROADWAY CAPACITY 9

Traffic Flow Characteristics – Basic traffic manoeuvres, Traffic stream flow characteristics,
SpeedFlow- Density Relations; Passenger Car Units – Mixed traffic flow and related issues – Concept
of PCU value- Factors affecting PCU values- Recommended PCU values for different conditions;
Capacity and Level of Service – Factors affecting practical capacity – Design Service Volumes.
UNIT 3 - COST – EFFECTIVE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 9
Traffic System Management: Regulatory Techniques- one way street, Reversible Street, Reversible
lane, Turning moment restrictions, closing streets; Traffic Control Devices – Traffic Signs – Road
Markings, Traffic Signals, Miscellaneous traffic control devices; Traffic Segregation – Vehicle
segregation, Pedestrian segregation, Traffic signals design; Bus Priority Techniques – Priority
manoeuvres – With-flow bus lane and contra-flow bus lane; Self- Enforcing Techniques- Demand
Management Techniques (TDM) Road pricing, parking control, Tolls, Staggering of
office/educational institution hours.
UNIT 4 - DESIGN OF ROAD INTERSECTIONS 9
Importance and Classification; Intersections at-grade – uncontrolled, channelised; Rotary intersections
(problems)- Signalised intersections (problems)- Grade Separated Intersections – merits and demerits,

186
types, pattern of intersections with different types of interchanges- Capacity, Concept diagrams.
UNIT 5 - DESIGN OF PARKING AND PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES AND CYCLE
9
TRACKS
Parking: Need for parking studies and its ill effects- Parking Standards for different land uses, different
types of parking - Conceptual plans for different types of parking; Pedestrians: Importance, Barriers,
Behaviour, Pedestrian facilities – Principles of planning, Level of Service (LoS), Design standards.;
Cycle Tracks: Principles of design, Design criteria, Design standards for Rural Expressways.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Analyze the problems and relating it with standards
CO2: Apply the principles of traffic flow characteristics and their relationships
CO3: Determine the various traffic management measures in addressing the demand Pricing
and ITS applications.
CO4: Designing various types of control and regulatory measures to meet an efficient
t raffic network.
CO5: Explain the various type of facilities and plan for non motorised transport

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kadiyali. L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2019.

2. Khanna .K and Justo C.E.G. and Veeraragavan, A Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Bros.,
Roorkee,10th Edition, 2014

3. Papacosta.P.S and Prevedouros.P.D, “ Transportation Engineering and Planning, 3rd Edition,

2015

187
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Indian Roads Congress (IRC) Specifications: Guidelines and special publications on Traffic
Planning and Management.
2. Salter. R.I and Hounsell N.B, Highway Traffic Analysis and design, Macmillan Press
Ltd.1996.
3. Roger P.Roess, William R.Mcshane and Elena S.Prassas, Traffic Engineering-2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall Publishers,, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 1998
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/101/105101008/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105101008

188
 CE606608 – PAVEMENT ENGINEERING
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To gains knowledge on various pavement materials.
• To have the knowledge on IRC guidelines for designing flexible pavement.
• To have the knowledge on IRC guidelines for designing rigid pavement.
• To provides knowledge on pavement construction.
• To assess quality and serviceability conditions of roads
UNIT 1 - PAVEMENT MATERIALS AND SUBGRADE ANALYSIS 8
Introduction – Pavement as layered structure – Pavement types -rigid and flexible-Subgrade analysis-
Stress and deflections in pavements- Pavement Materials and Testing- Modified Binders.

UNIT 2 - DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTS 10

Flexible pavement design – Advantages and disadvantages -Factors influencing design of flexible
pavement, Empirical – Mechanistic empirical and theoretical methods – Design procedure as per IRC
guidelines – Design and specification of rural roads.
UNIT 3 - DESIGN OF RIGID PAVEMENTS 9
Cement concrete pavements Factors influencing CC pavements – Modified Westergaard approach –
Design procedure as per IRC guidelines – Concrete roads and their scope in India.
UNIT 4 - PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION, EVALUATION AND MAINTENANCE 10
Construction Techniques practice of flexible and concrete pavement Pavement Evaluation - Causes of
distress in rigid and flexible pavements – Evaluation based on Surface Appearance, Cracks, Patches
and Pot Holes, Undulations, Raveling, Roughness, Skid Resistance. Structural Evaluation by
Deflection Measurements - Pavement Serviceability index, - Pavement maintenance (IRC
Recommendations only).
UNIT 5 - STABILIZATION OF PAVEMENTS 8
Stabilization with special reference to highway pavements – Choice of stabilizers – Testing and field
control - Stabilization for rural roads in India – Use of Geosynthetics in roads
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

189
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Get knowledge about types of rigid and flexible pavements
CO2: Design of rigid pavements
CO3: Design of flexible pavements
CO4: Determine the causes of distress in rigid and flexible pavements.
CO5: Understand stabilization of pavements, testing and field control
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - 3 1 - 2 1 - 1 2 1
CO2 2 1 3 1 2 - 1 - 2 1 - 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 - 1 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 - 1 3 3 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Khanna, S.K. and Justo C.E.G.and Veeraragavan, A, “Highway Engineering”, New Chand
and Brothers, Revised 10th Edition,2014.
2. Kadiyali, L.R., “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, Khannatech.
Publications, New Delhi,2015.
3. Subramanian K.P., "Highways, Railways, Airport and Harbour Engineering", Scitech
Publications, 7th Edition 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Yoder, R.J. and Witchak M.W. “Principles of Pavement Design”, John Wiley 2000
2. Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements, IRC-37–2012, The Indian roads Congress,
NewDelhi
3. Guideline for the Design of Rigid Pavements for Highways, IRC 58-2018, The Indian Road
Congress, NewDelhi.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/107/105107219/
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=exctAga2KXY

190
 CE606609 – URBAN PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To have the knowledge on urban classification area.
• To have the knowledge on planning process and theories.
• To identifying the development plan and evaluation.
• To provides knowledge on plan implementation and development projects.
• To identifying the regulations and laws related to urban planning.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 7
Definition of Human settlement, Urban area, Town, City, Metropolitan City, Megalopolis,
Urbanisation, Urbanism, Suburbanisation, Urban sprawl, Peri-urban areas, Central Business District
(CBD), Urban Agglomeration, Census definition of urban settlements, Classification of urban areas –
Positive and negative impacts of urbanisation, - Atal Mission for Rejuvenation and Urban
Transformation (AMRUT)

UNIT 2 - PLANNING PROCESS AND THEORIES 10

Principles of Planning –Stages in Planning Process – Goals, Objectives, Delineation of Planning
Areas, Draft Plans, Evaluation, Final Plan. Planning Theories - Garden City Concept, Geddesian
Triad by Patrick Geddes, Modernism Concept by Le-Corbusier, Radbun Concept, Neighbourhoods,
Theories of Ekistics, Bid-rent Theory by William Alonso, Green Belt Concept
UNIT 3 - DEVELOPMENT PLANS, PLAN FORMULATION AND EVALUATION 10
Types of plans – Regional Plan, Master Plan, Structure Plan, Detailed Development Plan, New Town/
Satellite town- Development Plan, urban nodes, Smart City Plan -Scope and Content of Regional Plan
(RP), Master Plan (MP), and the Detailed Development Plan (DDP), Methodologies for the
preparation of the RP, MP, and the DDP – Case Studies.
UNIT 4 - PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 10
Planning Standards, Project Formulation and evaluation; Project Report preparation and presentation;
Legal, Financial and Institutional constraints – Problems due to multiple laws, rules and institutions;
Financing of Urban Development Projects; Urban planning agencies and their functions in the plan
formulation and implementation - Waste collection planning for urban area
UNIT 5 - URBAN AND REGIONAL PLANNING LEGISLATIONS, REGULATIONS
8
AND DESIGNS

191
Town and Country Planning, Local Bodies and Land Acquisition Acts, Development and Building
Rules, Site analyses, Layouts and Buildings Design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Find the basic issues and meaning of terminologies in urban planning
CO2: Explain the different types of theories of urban planning and city development.
CO3: Apply the different types of plan, their strategies and their preparation process.
CO4: Comprehend the planning standards, evaluate the constraints and the financial mechanism
CO5: Knowledge on various town and country planning acts and their functions.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 2 1 - 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 2 1
CO2 2 1 3 2 - 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 1 3 1 - 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO4 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 - 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Goel, S.L Urban Development and Management, Deep and Deep publications, New Delhi
2002.
2. George Chadwick, A Systems view of planning, Pergamon press, Oxford 1978
3. Singh V.B, Revitalised Urban Administration in India, Kalpaz publication, Delhi, 2001
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tamil Nadu Town and Country Planning Act 1971, and Rules made thereunder,
Government of Tamil Nadu, Chennai
2. Thooyavan, K.R., Human Settlements – A Planning Guide to Beginners, M.A
Publications, Chennai, 2005
3. Urban & Regional Development Plans Formulation & Implementation (URDPFI)
Guidelines, Vol I & II, Jan 2015, Govt of India, Ministry of Urban Development
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/124/107/124107158/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_ar07/preview

192
 CE606610 – GIS FOR TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS (NPTEL)
L T P C
Course Category: Program Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To have the knowledge on GIS data models.
• To have the knowledge on data mapping and capture concept.
• To identifying the transport network routings.
• To provides knowledge on facility location and spatial aggregation.
• To identifying the transportation analysis with GIS modeling.

UNIT 1 - GIS – TRANSPORTATION DATA MODELS 9

Data Domains and Data Modelling in GIST - Data Modelling Techniques - Data Modelling and
Design Issues - Graph Theory and Network Analysis - Network representation of a Transportation
System - Linear referencing methods and systems - Transportation Data Models for ITS and related
Applications.

UNIT 2 - TRANSPORTATION DATA SOURCES AND INTEGRATION 9

Basic Mapping Concepts - Transportation Data Capture and Data Products - Transportation Data
Integration - Spatial Data Quality - Spatial and Network aggregation.
UNIT 3 - SHORTEST PATHS AND ROUTING 9
Fundamental Network Properties - Fundamental Properties of Algorithms - Shortest Path Algorithms
- Routing Vehicles within Networks.
UNIT 4 - NETWORK FLOWS AND FACILITY LOCATION 9
Flow-through Uncongested Networks - Flow-through Congested Network - Facility location within
Networks - Spatial Aggregation in Network Routing and location problems.
UNIT 5 - GIS-BASED SPATIAL ANALYSIS AND MODELING 9
GIS and spatial analysis - Urban sprawl - GIS Analytical functions - Coupling Transportation Analysis
and Modelling with GIS - Customizing GIS - Supporting Advanced Transportation Analysis in GIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

193
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Develop GIS-T Data Models
CO2: Represent Transportation Data in GIS Environment.
CO3: Analyze Transport Networks.
CO4: Integrate ITS with GIS.
CO5: Model spatial and transportation facilities in GIS

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Miller HJ and Shaw SL, Geographic Information Systems for Transportation (GIST):
Principles and Applications, Oxford University Press, 2001
2. Henk J. Scholten and John Stillwell Geographical Information Systems for Urban and
Regional Planning, Springer, 2010
3. C.P.Lo, Albert K. W.Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems,
Pearson, 2016, 2nd Edition
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adaptation of Geographic Information Systems for Transportation, NCHRP Report 359, TRB,
Washington, DC, 1993.
2. Geographic Information Systems Applications in Transit: A Synthesis of Transit Practice,
TCRP Synthesis 55, TRB, 2004.
3. Simlowitz H.J., GIS Support Transportation System Planning, International GIS Sources
Book.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/108/105108073/
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/107/105107206/

194
INSTITUTE
ELECTIVES
 CE607103-CLIMATE CHANGE ADAPTATION AND MITIGATION
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the Earth's atmosphere and its role in
shaping weather and climate patterns.
• To Analyzing the various elements related to climate change.
• To identify, assess, and articulate the multifaceted impacts of climate change on both natural
and human systems.
• To critically evaluate the feasibility, effectiveness, and potential trade-offs
• To identify, analyze, and evaluate various alternate fuels and renewable energy technologies

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Atmosphere – weather and Climate - climate parameters – Temperature, Rainfall, Humidity, Wind –
Global ocean circulation – El Nino and its effect - Carbon cycle

UNIT 2 - ELEMENTS RELATED TO CLIMATE CHANGE 9

Greenhouse gases - Total carbon dioxide emissions by energy sector – industrial, commercial,
transportation, residential – Impacts – air quality, hydrology, green space - Causes of global and
regional climate change – Changes in patterns of temperature, precipitation and sea level rise –
Greenhouse effect
UNIT 3 - IMPACTS OF CLIMATE CHANGE 9
Effects of Climate Changes on living things – health effects, malnutrition, human migration,
socioeconomic impacts- tourism, industry and business, vulnerability assessment- infrastructure,
population and sector – Agriculture, forestry, human health, coastal areas
UNIT 4 - MITIGATING CLIMATE CHANGE 9
IPCC Technical Guidelines for Assessing Climate Change Impact and Adaptation - Identifying
adaption options – designing and implementing adaption measures – surface albedo environment-
reflective roofing and reflective paving – enhancement of evapotranspiration - tree planting
programme – green roofing strategies – energy conservation in buildings – energy efficiencies –
carbon sequestration.
UNIT 5 - ALTERNATE FUELS AND RENEWABLE ENERGY 9
Energy source – coal, natural gas – wind energy, hydropower, solar energy, nuclear energy,
geothermal energy – biofuels – Energy policies for a cool future - Energy Audit.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

195
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: an insight into carbon cycle, physical basis of the natural greenhouse effect, including the
meaning of the term radiative forcing, climate change, global warming and measures to
adapt and to mitigate the impacts of climate change
CO2: understanding on the growing scientific consensus established through the IPCC as well as
the complexities and uncertainties
CO3: ability to plan climate change mitigation and adaptation projects including the use of
alternate fuels and renewable energy
CO4: Gain in-depth knowledge on climate models
CO5: Post process the model outputs for climate impact assessment, know about adaptation
strategies

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1
- 3 - - - - - - - 1 - 2 2 2
CO2
- - - - - 2 2 - - - - - 2 2
CO3
2 3 - 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4
2 - 2 2 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 2
CO5
- 3 - - 3 - - - 3 2 3 2 2 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ruddiman W.F, freeman W.H. and Company, “Earth‟s Climate Past and Future”, 2001
2. Velma. I. Grover “Global Warming and Climate” Change. Vol I an II. Science Publishers,
2005.
3. Dash Sushil Kumar, “Climate Change – An Indian Perspective”, Cambridge University Press
India Pvt. Ltd, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. IPCC Fourth Assessment Report, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2007
2. Thomas E, Lovejoy and Lee Hannah “Climate Change and Biodiversity”, TERI Publishers,
2005
3. Jan C. van Dam, Impacts of “Climate Change and Climate Variability on Hydrological
Regimes”, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/nou21_ge37/preview
2. https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar5/wg1/

196
 CE607104- SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce the basic concepts of sustainable development.
• To aware those about the role of technology towards environmental sustainability.
• To give a basic understanding of sustainable development framework, its pillars and
application.
• To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental management.
• To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION TO SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Introduction to Sustainable Development: Glimpse into History and Current practices - Broad
introduction to SD - its importance, need, impact and implications; definition coined; evolution of SD
perspectives (MDGs AND SDGs) over the years; recent debates; 1987 Brundtland Commission and
outcome; later UN summits (Rio summit, etc.) and outcome.

UNIT 2 - ECOSYSTEM & SUSTAINABILITY 9

Fundamentals of ecology - types of ecosystems & interrelationships, factors influencing sustainability
of ecosystems, ecosystem restoration - developmental needs. Introduction to sustainability & its
factors, requirements for sustainability: food security and agriculture, renewable resources - water and
energy, non-renewable resources, factors and trade-offs, sustainability conflicts, a conceptual
framework for linking sustainability and sustainable development.
UNIT 3 - FRAMEWORKS OF SUSTAINABILITY 9
Analytical frameworks in sustainability studies, sustainability metrics: criteria and indicators; the
significance of quantitative and qualitative assessments of sustainability; current metrics and
limitations; metrics for mapping and measuring sustainable development; application of the metrics
in real scenarios.
UNIT 4 - SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 9
Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects of
sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and protocols

197
Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate change- Global,
Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies. Concept of Carbon
Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.
UNIT 5 - SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9
Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy Cycles
carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization- Socio
economic and technological change.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Recognize the basics about sustainable development & its Concepts.
CO2: Understand the basic concept of Sustainable Development (SD), the environmental.
CO3: Understand what is sustainable development framework and different governmental
policies which aim for it.
CO4: To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
CO5: To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials,
energy cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - -
CO2 3 2 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - -
CO3 - - - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - -
CO4 3 2 1 1 - 2 3 - - - - 1 - -
CO5 3 2 1 1 - 2 3 - - - - 1 - -

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sustainable Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case Studies, D.T. Allen, and D.R. Shonnard,
Prentice Hall,(2011
2. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall
3. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning
4. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018

198
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Abdul Malik, Elisabeth Grohmann. Environment protection strategies for sustainable

development by. ISBN 978-94-007-1591-2.
2. Sylvie Faucheux, Martin O’ Corner Jan van der strateen. Sustainable development: concepts,
rationalities, and strategies, ISBN 978-94-017-3188-1.
3. Jennifer A. Elliott. An introduction to sustainable development. ISBN-13: 978- 0415590730
4. Chopra, K., and Kadekodi, G.K. (1999), Operationalisting Sustainable Development,
SagePublication, New Delhi
WEB RESOURCES:

1. United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (UN SDGs) - Course (nptel.ac.in)

2. System design for sustainability - Course (nptel.ac.in)

199
 CE607105 - WATERSHED CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide the technical and sociological understanding of a watershed.
• To demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of soil conservation measures.
• To assess the potential of these techniques to enhance water availability, mitigate water
scarcity, and improve water quality.
• To utilize the Geographic Information Systems (GIS) for watershed management.
• To understand the watershed management principles and practices.

UNIT 1 - WATERSHED CONCEPTS 9

Watershed – Definition, Need and Elements – Principles - Influencing Factors: Geology – Soil –
Morphological Characteristics - Toposheet - Delineation – Codification – Prioritization – Watershed
Atlas.

UNIT 2 - SOIL CONSERVATION MEASURES 9

Types of Erosion – Water and Wind Erosion: Causes, Factors, Effects and Management – Soil
Conservation Measures: Agronomical and Mechanical – Design of Terraces and Bunds - Estimation
of Soil Loss – USLE Equation - Sedimentation.
UNIT 3 - WATER HARVESTING AND CONSERVATION 9
Yield from a Catchment - Traditional Water Harvesting Techniques – Micro-Catchments - Design of
Small Water Harvesting Structures: Farm Ponds, Percolation Tanks, Check dams, Grassed
Waterways.
UNIT 4 - GIS FOR WATERSHED MANAGEMENT 9
Applications of Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System - Role of Decision Support
System – Conceptual Models and Case Studies.
UNIT 5 - WATERSHED MANAGEMENT 9
Project Proposal Formulation - Watershed Development Plan – Entry Point Activities – Watershed
Economics - Agroforestry – Grassland Management – Wasteland Management – Watershed Approach
in Government Programmes – People’s Participation – Evaluation of Watershed Management
Programmes – Integrated Watershed Management – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

200
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Recognize and Interpret the morphological features of a watershed.
CO2: State, design and sketch the soil conservation structures.
CO3: Describe the micro catchment and apply the concepts to design the small water harvesting
structures.
CO4: Illustrate the application of modern tools and technology in the management of watershed.
CO5: Classify the management activities and to develop an integrated watershed development
plan.
CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 - - 1 1 - 1 - 3 2 - 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2
CO4 - - - - 3 - - - 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 - 2 2 2 - 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ghanashyam Das, Hydrology and Soil Conservation Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2009.
2. Suresh, R. Soil and Water Conservation Engineering, Standard Publishers and Distributors
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2020.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Glenn O Schwab. etal, Soil and Water Conservation engineering, Wiley India Private Limited,
2009.
2. Heathcote, I. W. Integrated Watershed Management: Principles and Practice. John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., New York, Second Edition 2009.
3. John G. Lyon, GIS for Water Resources and Watershed Management, CRC Press, 2002.
4. Vijay P. Singh, Donald K. Frevert, Watershed Models, CRC Press, 2005.
5. Vir Singh, Raj, Watershed Planning and Management, Bio- Green Publisher, 2016.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105101010
2. https://www.nptelvideos.com/course.php?id=372

201
 CE607203 - ENVIRONMENTAL RISK MANAGEMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To Identifying and classifying environmental hazards and risks.
• To study the different hazard identification.
• To lean the tools that can be used in predicting and managing risks.
• To learn the risk communication and management.
• To study the different case studies on development projects.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 7
Sources of Environmental hazards – Environmental and ecological risks – Environmental risk
assessment framework – Regulatory perspectives and requirements – Risk Analysis and Management
and historical perspective - Social benefit Vs technological risks - Path to risk analysis - Perception of
risk - Risk assessment in different disciplines.

UNIT 2 - ELEMENS OF ENVIRONMENTAL RISK ASSESSMENT 11

Hazard identification and accounting – Fate and behaviour of toxics and persistent substances in the
environment – Properties, processes and parameters that control fate and transport of contaminants –
Receptor exposure to environmental contaminants – Dose Response Evaluation – Exposure
Assessment – Exposure Factors, Slope Factors, Dose Response calculations and Dose Conversion
Factors – Risk Characterization and consequence determination – Vulnerability assessment –
Uncertainty analysis.
UNIT 3 - TOOLS AND METHODS FOR RISK ASSESSMENT 11
HAZOP and FEMA methods – Cause failure analysis – Event tree and fault tree modeling and analysis
– Multimedia and multipath way exposure modeling of contaminant migration for estimation of
contaminant concentrations in air, water, soils, vegetation and animal products – Estimation of
carcinogenic and non-carcinogenic risks to human health – Methods in Ecological risk assessment –
Probabilistic risk assessments – radiation risk assessment – Data sources and evaluation.
UNIT 4 - RISK MANAGEMENT 7
Risk communication and Risk Perception – comparative risks – Risk based decision making – Risk
based environmental standard setting – Risk Cost Benefit optimization and tradeoffs – Emergency
Preparedness Plans – Emergency planning for chemical agent release – Design of risk management
programs – risk based remediation; Risk communication, adaptive management, precaution and stake

202
holder involvement.
UNIT 5 - APPLICATIONS 9
Case studies on risk assessment and management for hazardous chemical storage – Chemical
industries – Tanneries – Textile industries – Mineral processing and Petrochemical plants – Hazardous
waste disposal facilities – nuclear power plants – contaminated site remediation – Case histories on
Bhopal, Chernobyl, Seveso, Three Mile Island.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Identify fate and behaviour of toxics and persistent substances in the environment.
CO2: Analyse the hazard identification of risk assessment.
CO3: Analyse the role of different evidentiary approaches to supporting risk assessments.
CO4: Apply and to develop the skill to prepare principle of risk management for solving
environmental problems.
CO5: Evaluate environmental impact assessment reports

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 1 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2

1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jeanne X. Kasperson, Roger E. Kasperson, Global Environmental Risk, United

Nations University Press, 2nd Edition 2013.
2. Cutter, S.L., Environmental Risk and Hazards, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 1999
3. Raghavan K. V. and A A. Khan, "Methodologies in Hazard Identification and Risk
Assessment", Manual by CLRI, 1990

203
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Sam Mannan, Lees' Loss Prevention in the Process Industries, Hazard Identification,
Assessment and Control, 4th Edition, Butterworth Heineman, 2012.
2. Kolluru Rao, Bartell Steven, Pitblado R and Stricoff “Risk Assessment and Management
Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc., New York, 1996.
3. Kofi Asante Duah, “Risk Assessment in Environmental management”, John Wiley and sons,
Singapore, 1998
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.google.co.in/books/edition/Risk_Assessment_Guidance_for_Superfund_
E/3wlSAAAAMAAJ?hl=en&gbpv=1&dq=environmental+risk+
2. https://www.google.co.in/books/edition/Framework_for_Application_of_the_Toxicit/
ojAzut6oEQEC?hl=en&gbpv=1&dq=environmental+risk+assessment+websource&pg
=PA25&printsec=frontcover

204
 CE607204- ENERGY EFFICIENCY, ACOUSTICS AND DAY LIGHTING IN BUILDING
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To provide good knowledge regarding building technology and building services
engineering.
• To contribute to a low demand for purchased energy to buildings.
• To provide additional knowledge regarding building physics, ventilation technology and
indoor climate.
• To learn the sounds and absorptive constructions.
• To study day lighting and insulation of buildings.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 8
Climate adapted and climate rejecting buildings – Heat Transfer – Measuring Conduction – Thermal
Storage – Measurement of Radiation – The Greenhouse Effect – Convection – Measuring latent and
sensible heat – Psychrometry Chart – Thermal Comfort – Microclimate, Site Planning and
Development – Temperature – Humidity – Wind – Optimum Site Locations – Sun Path Diagrams -
Sun Protection – Types of Shading Devices – Design responses to energy conservation strategies.

UNIT 2 - DAYLIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL LIGHTING 10

Materials, components and details – Insulation – Optical materials – Radiant Barriers – Glazing
materials – Glazing Spectral Response – Day lighting – Sources and concepts - Building Design
Strategies – Case Studies – Daylight apertures – Light Shelves – Codal requirements – Day lighting
design – Electric Lighting – Light Distribution – Electric Lighting control for day lighted buildings -
Switching controls – Coefficient of utilization – Electric Task Lighting – Electric Light Zones – Power
Adjustment Factors.
UNIT 3 - DESIGN FOR CLIMATIC ZONES 10

Energy efficiency – An Overview of Design Concepts and Architectural Interventions – Embodied

Energy – Low Embodied Energy Materials – Passive Downdraft Evaporative Cooling – Design of
Energy Efficient Buildings for Various Zones – Cold and cloudy – Cold and sunny – Composite – Hot
and dry – Moderate – Warm and humid – Case studies of residences, office buildings and other
buildings in each zones – Commonly used software packages in energy efficient building analysis and
design – Energy Audit – Certification.

205
UNIT 4 - ACOUSTICS 10
Sound waves, sound field - Acoustics and physiology, basic notions, sound levels and loudness -
Sound measurement, frequency band, frequency band analysis, noise report, hygienic limits - Urban
acoustics, noise attenuation - Room acoustics, diffuse sound field, sound field - Absorptive
constructions, membranes and oscillating plates, Helmholtz resonators. Sound insulation, rating of air-
born and structure-born sound insulation - Air- born sound insulation, Watter’s method.
UNIT 5 - DAY LIGHTING 7
Day lighting: Lighting principles and fundamentals – Design Sky, Indian sky, daylight prediction and
design of fenestration – Ceiling reflector – Floor slope – Reverberation time – Sound in enclosure –
Glare index - Methods for evaluation of day lighting in buildings - day lighting and insulation for the
building design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Demonstrate a good ability to calculate the energy balance of buildings
CO2: Evaluate different opportunities to save energy with measures regarding both building
technology and building services engineering
CO3: Assess the potential conflict between energy conservation and indoor climate for
different energy saving measures
CO4: Determination of requirements for indoor acoustic comfort and design of building
protection against exterior noise.
CO5: Design for natural ventilation and day lighting & design of space for external andinternal
noise control.

CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1
3 2 3 - - - - 1 - - - 2
CO2 2 1
3 2 3 - - - - 1 - - - 2
CO3 2 1
3 2 3 - - - - 1 - - - 2
CO4 - - - - - - 2 1
3 2 3 2 1 2
CO5 - - - - - - 2 1
3 2 3 - 1 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Brown, G.Z. and DeKay, M., Sun, Wind and Light – Architectural Design Strategies, John
Wiley and Sons Inc,3rd Edition, 2014.
2. Majumdar, M, Energy – Efficient Buildings in India, Tata Energy Research Institute, Ministry
of Non-Conventional Energy Sources, 2009.
3. Markus,T.A. & Morris, E.N., "Building Climate and Energy" Pitman publishing limited. 1980.

206
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. A.K.Mittal, “Electrical and Mechanical Services in High Rise Building: Design and
Estimation Manual”, CBS, 2015.
2. Descottes, Herve and Cecilia E. Ramos, “Architectural Lighting: Designing with Light
and Space, Princeton Architectural Press, Princeton, 2013.
3. The Lighting Handbook, IES, 2011 and National Lighting Code, SP 27:2010.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/102/105102175/
2. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/105102175/L01.html

207
 CE607303 - PLASTIC WASTE MANAGEMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To identify, evaluate, and characteristic sources of environmental pollutants.
• Understanding and implementing primary recycling techniques for plastic wastes.
• Understanding and implementing secondary recycling techniques for plastic wastes.
• Understanding and implementing tertiary recycling techniques for plastic wastes.
• Implementing strategies to reduce and prevent plastic waste disposal.

UNIT 1 - SOURCES AND CHARACTERIZATION 9

Plastic and environment value additions, global policy, regulations, waste energy management. Waste
treatment of various plastic plants, estimations of power requirement & efficiency of size reduction
operation of plastics, environment pollution aspects. Need for recycling – Sorting and segregation of
waste – Plastics identification- Plastics Production and composition – Plastics waste – Composition,
quantities and disposal alternatives.

UNIT 2 - PRIMARY RECYCLING OF PLASTIC WASTES 9

Primary recycling – Equipment’s for primary recycling. Specific recycling techniques – PE films, PP
battery case – Crushing and separation – PET films.
UNIT 3 - SECONDARY RECYCLING OF PLASTIC WASTES 9
Recycling of plastics from urban waste – rheology, density, mechanical behavior. Secondary recycling
Plastics wastes containing paper – hydrolytic treatment – processing methods – processing of mixed
plastics waste – household waste – industrial sector – TPO based materials.
UNIT 4 - TERTIARY RECYCLING OF PLASTIC WASTES 9
Use of recyclable plastics in motor vehicles – recoverable materials – disposal of residuals – recyclable
plastic components – virgin and recycled HDPE – Fluorinated and unfluorinated HDPE – fuel tanks.
Tertiary recycling – Reactors used – Advantages – Dry method wet method - use of Recyclable plastics
in automobiles.
UNIT 5 - PLASTIC WASTE DISPOSAL REDUCTION AND PREVENTION 9
Overview of plastic waste disposal options (landfill, incineration, and ocean dumping) -
Environmental and health impacts of plastic waste disposal - Regulations and policies for plastic waste
disposal - Strategies for reducing plastic waste generation (reuse, redesign, and substitution) -
Importance of public awareness and education for plastic waste reduction.

208
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Sources of plastics waste generation and the segregation methods for recycling the plastics.
CO2: Learn about various equipment for recycling of plastics.
CO3: Understand the process involved in secondary recycling of plastics.
CO4: Comprehend the tertiary recycling of plastics.
CO5: Learn about disposal reduction and prevention of plastics.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - -
2 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2
CO2 2 -
3 - 3 - - 3 - - 3 - 2 2
CO3 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 - - - -
CO4 2 2 2 2 - - 3 2
2 2 - 2 - -
CO5 2 - 2 2 - - 2 2
3 2 2 - - -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Polymer recycling, Science, Technology and Applications, John Scheirs, John Wiley and Sons,
England 1988.
2. Recycling of Plastic Materials (Ed), Francesco Paolo La Mantia, Chem Tec Publishing,1993.
3. Plastics Waste Management (Ed), Nabil Mustafa, Marcel Dekker, New York,1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Degradable polymers, Recycling and Plastic Waste Management (Eds) Ann Christine
Albertson and Samuel J. Huang, Marcel Dekker, New York.
2. Recycling and Plastics Waste Management, Edited by Dr.J.S.Anand, CIPET, 1997.
3. John Schiles, Polymer Recycling.
WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ce13/preview
2. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/102/105102012/

209
 CE607304 – WASTE TO ENERGY CONVERSION
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Develop a comprehensive understanding of waste to energy conversion technologies and
their role in sustainable waste management practices
• Analyze and evaluate the suitability of different waste to energy conversion technologies
for different types of waste streams
• Develop skills in project planning, implementation, and evaluation of waste to energy
projects
• Enhance critical thinking and problem-solving skills related to waste management and
renewable energy
• Develop communication and teamwork skills through group projects and presentations

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION TO WASTE TO ENERGY CONVERSION 9

Overview of waste to energy conversion - Types of waste and their characteristics - Energy potential
of different waste streams - Environmental and economic benefits and drawbacks of waste to energy
conversion

UNIT 2 - WASTE COLLECTION AND HANDLING 9

Collection methods for different types of waste - Transfer and transport of waste - Waste sorting and
segregation - Pre-processing of waste for energy conversion
UNIT 3 - THERMAL CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Combustion-based technologies: incineration, gasification, pyrolysis - Anaerobic digestion -
Emerging technologies: plasma gasification, hydrothermal carbonization - Efficiency and emissions
Considerations.
UNIT 4 - BIOLOGICAL CONVERSION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Composting – Biomethanation - Anaerobic co-digestion - Efficiency and emissions considerations-
the different types of biological conversion technologies and their mechanisms - Analyze the
efficiency and emissions considerations of different biological conversion technologies.
UNIT 5 - WASTE TO ENERGY PROJECT PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION 9
Regulatory and permitting requirements - Site selection and design considerations - Project financing
and economics - Operation and maintenance considerations - Case studies of successful waste to
energy projects.

210
 TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the fundamentals of waste to energy conversion.
CO2: Understand the various methods of waste collection and handling.
CO3: Understand the principles and applications of thermal conversion technologies.
CO4: Understand the principles and applications of biological conversion technologies.
CO5: Understand the project planning and implementation process for waste to energy
conversionprojects.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - -
2 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2
CO2 2 -
2 - 1 - - 1 - - 3 - 2 2
CO3 1 2
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 - - - -
CO4 2 2 2
2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 - - -
CO5 2 2 2
2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - - -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. "Waste to Energy Conversion Technology" by Naomi B Klinghoffer (2019)
2. "Waste Management Practices: Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial" by John Pichtel
(2018).
3. "Anaerobic Digestion of Organic Waste: A Renewable Source of Biogas and Soil
Fertilizer" by M.R. El-Fadel and L.T.M. Jijakli (2019).
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. "Waste to Energy: Technologies and Project Implementation" by Marc J. Rogoff and Francois
Screve (2011).
2. Anaerobic Digestion of Organic Waste: A Renewable Source of Biogas and Soil Fertilizer" by
M.R. El-Fadel and L.T.M. Jijakli (2019).
3. "Renewable Energy Finance: Powering the Future" by Charles W. Donovan (2015).
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ch16/preview
2. https://www.perlego.com/book/1829721/waste-to-energy-conversion-technology-pdf

211
 CE607402 – ELECTRONIC WASTE MANAGEMENT
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• Understanding and navigating the sources, classification, and regulatory framework
surrounding environmental pollutants.
• To demonstrate proficiency in waste characterization and implementing source reduction
strategies.
• To minimize environmental risks and hazards.
• To evaluate the suitability of different processing technologies for various types of waste
streams.
• Design and implement sustainable waste disposal solutions that prioritize waste reduction,
pollution prevention, and environmental protection.

UNIT 1 - SOURCES, CLASSIFICATION AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK 9

Types and Sources of solid and hazardous wastes - Need for solid and hazardous waste management
– Elements of integrated waste management and roles of stakeholders - Salient features of Indian
legislations on management and handling of municipal solid wastes, hazardous wastes, biomedical
wastes, lead acid batteries, electronic wastes , plastics and fly ash – Financing waste management.

UNIT 2 - WASTE CHARACTERIZATION AND SOURCE REDUCTION 9

Waste generation rates and variation - Composition, physical, chemical and biological properties of
solid wastes – Hazardous Characteristics – TCLP tests – waste sampling and characterization plan -
Source reduction of wastes
UNIT 3 - STORAGE, COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT OF WASTES 9
Handling and segregation of wastes at source – storage and collection of municipal solid wastes –
Analysis of Collection systems - Need for transfer and transport – Transfer stations Optimizing waste
allocation– compatibility, storage, labelling and handling of hazardous wastes – hazardous waste
manifests and transport
UNIT 4 - WASTE PROCESSING TECHNOLOGIES 8
Objectives of waste processing – material separation and processing technologies –biological &
chemical conversion technologies – methods and controls of Composting.
UNIT 5 - WASTE DISPOSAL 10
Waste disposal options – Disposal in landfills - Landfill Classification, types and methods – site

212
selection - design and operation of sanitary landfills, secure landfills and landfill bioreactors – leachate
and landfill gas management – landfill closure and environmental monitoring – Rehabilitation of open
dumps – landfill remediation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the concepts of sources and classifications of waste management.
CO2: Evaluate the conceptual ideas about the waste characterisation and waste reduction.
CO3: Create new ideologies of storage, collection and transportation of wastes.
CO4: Create the basic ideas about waste processing technologies and its applications.
CO5: Understanding the concepts of waste disposal methods and uses.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - -
2 1 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2
CO2 2 -
2 1 1 - - 1 - - 3 - 2 2
CO3 1 2
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 - - - 2
CO4 2 2 2
2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 - - 2
CO5 2 2 2
2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - - 2
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. George Techobanoglous et al, ‖Integrated Solid Waste Management, McGraw - Hill, 2014.
2. Manual on Municipal Solid waste Management, CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development,
Govt.of. India, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Techobanoglous Thiesen Ellasen; Solid Waste Engineering Principles and Management,
McGraw - Hill 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. R.E.Landrefh and P.A.Rebers,‖ Municipal Solid Wastes-Problems & Solutions‖ ,Lewis, 1997.
2. Blide A.D.& Sundaresan, B.B,‖Solid Waste Management in DevelopingCountries, INSDOC,
1993.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/105/105/105105169/

213
 CE607403 – ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING & ANALYSIS
L T P C
Course Category: Institutional Elective Course Type: Theory
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To introduce about instrumental methods of monitoring the quality.
• To educate techniques and applications of Spectroscopic Methods.
• To educate techniques and applications of Chromatrographic Methods.
• To introduce about ecological modeling, single and multi species modeling on a brief.
• To educate about the modeling of CSTR and the kinetics of reaction taking place in it.

UNIT 1 - INTRODUCTION 9
Wet Chemistry methods and their limitations - Instrumental Methods, Selection of method Precision
and Accuracy, Error in measuring signals - Quality control & assurance Sample preservation, Sample
preparation and analyte isolation

UNIT 2 - SPECTROSCOPIC METHODS 9

Principles, techniques and applications of spectrophotometry, fluorimetry, nephelometry and
turbidimetry, Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (Flame, graphite furnace and hydride generation),
Atomic Emission Spectrometry (AES) , flame and Inducted Coupled Plasma (ICP) – TOC Analyzer
UNIT 3 - CHROMATROGRAPHIC METHODS 9
Column, Paper and thin layer chromatography (TLC)- Principles, techniques and applications of GC,
GC-MS, High performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and Ion chromatograph (IC)- Hyphenated
techniques for Environmental contaminant(trace organics) analysis
UNIT 4 - ECOLOGICAL SYSTEM 9
Basic concepts in ecology and ecological modeling, Population Dynamics: Birth and death processes.
Single species growth, Prey-predator models: Lotka-Volterra, Rosenzweig-MacArther, Kolmogorov
models. Multi-species modeling - Structural analysis and stability of complex ecosystems
UNIT 5 - CONTINUOUS-FLOW REACTOR MODELING 9
CSTR, Plug-Flow, Dispersion. A case study of a tubular reactor with axial dispersion, Parameter
Calibration: Search algorithms for nonlinear dynamical models, Variance of estimated parameters.
Application to Monod and Haldane kinetics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

214
COURSE OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the concept of various instrumentation techniques.
CO2: Learn techniques and applications of Spectroscopic Methods.
CO3: Learn techniques and applications of Chromatrographic Methods.
CO4: Understand the basic concept of Ecological System.
CO5: Learn parameters of modeling of CSTR.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 - -
2 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2
CO2 2 -
2 - 1 - - 1 - - 3 - 2 2
CO3 1 2
3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 - - - -
CO4 2 2 2
2 2 - 2 2 2 - 2 - - -
CO5 2 2 2
2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - - -
1- low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' no correlation

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Barceló, D.(editor), “Environmental analysis. Techniques, Applications and Quality
Assurance”, Elsevier, The Netherlands, 1996.
2. Deaton, M.L and Winebrake, J.J., "Dynamic Modeling of Environmental Systems",
Springer-Verlag, 2000.
3. Willard H. Merritt, L. Dean, D.A. and Settle, F.A. ‘Instrumental methods of analysis Edn.
Words Worth, New York, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Reeve, R.N., “Introduction to Environmental Analysis”, Analytical Techniques in the

Sciences, John Wiley & Sons, Chichester, UK, 2002.
2. Paul R. Loconto Trace Environmental Quantitative Analysis: Principles, Techniques, and
Applications, Marcel Dekker; 1 edition (May 2001)
3. Orhon, D and Artan, N., "Modeling of Activated Sludge Systems, Technomic" Publ. Co.,
1994.
WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/103/106/103106162/
2. https://www.env.go.jp/earth/coop/coop/materials/14-tbseme/14-tbseme.pdf

215